Part Number Hot Search : 
1G10UM C1454 XC9116 3F828B 74F38SCX CR360 40060 W15NA50
Product Description
Full Text Search
 

To Download TMP86FM26UG Datasheet File

  If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .  
 
 


  Datasheet File OCR Text:
 8 Bit Microcontroller
TLCS-870/C Series
TMP86FM26UG
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023_D TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. It is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most recent TOSHIBA products specifications. Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the "Handling Guide for Semiconductor Devices," or "TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook" etc. 021023_A The TOSHIBA products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). These TOSHIBA products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunction or failure of which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury ("Unintended Usage"). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended Usage of TOSHIBA products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_B The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_Q The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No responsibility is assumed by TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patents or other rights of TOSHIBA or the third parties. 070122_C The products described in this document are subject to foreign exchange and foreign trade control laws. 060925_E For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3 of the chapter entitled Quality and Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
(c) 2007 TOSHIBA CORPORATION All Rights Reserved
Revision History
Date 2007/3/27 2007/7/27 Revision 1 2 First Release Contents Revised
Table of Contents
TMP86FM26UG
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 4 5
2. Operational Description
2.1 CPU Core Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Memory Address Map............................................................................................................................... 9 Program Memory (Flash) .......................................................................................................................... 9 Data Memory (RAM) ............................................................................................................................... 10 Clock Generator...................................................................................................................................... 10 Timing Generator .................................................................................................................................... 12 Operation Mode Control Circuit .............................................................................................................. 13
Single-clock mode Dual-clock mode STOP mode Configuration of timing generator Machine cycle
2.2
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3
System Clock Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2.2.1 2.2.2.2 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.2.3.3 2.2.4.1 2.2.4.2 2.2.4.3 2.2.4.4
2.2.4
Operating Mode Control ......................................................................................................................... 18
STOP mode IDLE1/2 mode and SLEEP1/2 mode IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes (IDLE0, SLEEP0) SLOW mode
2.3
Reset Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
External Reset Input ............................................................................................................................... 33 Address trap reset .................................................................................................................................. 34 Watchdog timer reset.............................................................................................................................. 34 System clock reset.................................................................................................................................. 34 Clock Stop Detection Reset .................................................................................................................... 35 Internal Reset Detection Flags ............................................................................................................... 35
2.4
2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.4.1 2.4.2
Clock Stop Detection Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 36 Control .................................................................................................................................................... 36
Setting the minimum and maximum values for clock stop detection Enabling/Disabling the clock stop detection circuit Generating and releasing a reset
2.4.2.1 2.4.2.2 2.4.2.3
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.1 3.2 Interrupt latches (IL21 to IL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Interrupt enable register (EIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF) .......................................................................................................... 42 Individual interrupt enable flags (EF21 to EF4) ...................................................................................... 43
Note 3: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 3.3 Interrupt Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.2.1 3.2.2
i
3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.4.1 3.4.2
Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows........................................................................ 45 Saving/restoring general-purpose registers ............................................................................................ 46 Interrupt return ........................................................................................................................................ 47
Using PUSH and POP instructions Using data transfer instructions
3.3.2.1 3.3.2.2
3.4
Software Interrupt (INTSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Undefined Instruction Interrupt (INTUNDEF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 External Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Address error detection .......................................................................................................................... 48 Debugging .............................................................................................................................................. 48
3.5 3.6 3.7
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.1 4.2 SFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 DBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5. I/O Ports
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 Port P1 (P17 to P10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P2 (P24 to P20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P3 (P33 to P30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P5 (P57 to P50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P6 (P67 to P60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P7(P77 to P70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 60 62 65 67 69
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.1 6.2 Watchdog Timer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Watchdog Timer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer ................................................................... Watchdog Timer Enable ......................................................................................................................... Watchdog Timer Disable ........................................................................................................................ Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)...................................................................................................... Watchdog Timer Reset ........................................................................................................................... Selection of Address Trap in Internal RAM (ATAS) ................................................................................ Selection of Operation at Address Trap (ATOUT) .................................................................................. Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)....................................................................................................... Address Trap Reset ................................................................................................................................ 72 73 74 74 75
6.3
6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5
Address Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
76 76 76 77
6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.1 Time Base Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 79 Control .................................................................................................................................................... 79 Function .................................................................................................................................................. 80 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 81 Control .................................................................................................................................................... 81 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.2.1 7.2.2
7.2
Divider Output (DVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
ii
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.1 8.2 8.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Timer mode............................................................................................................................................. 87 Event Counter mode ............................................................................................................................... 88 Pulse Width Measurement mode............................................................................................................ 89 Frequency Measurement mode .............................................................................................................. 90
8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 9.2 9.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4) ................................................................................................................ 99 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3, 4) ...................................................................................................... 100 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC3, 4)................................................................... 100 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3, 4)................................................................ 103 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4) ............................................................................................................ 105 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3 and 4) .............................................................................................. 106 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)........................................................ 106 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC3 and 4) ............................................. 109 Warm-Up Counter Mode....................................................................................................................... 111
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1) High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.5 9.3.6 9.3.7 9.3.8 9.3.9
9.3.9.1 9.3.9.2
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 10.2 10.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6) ............................................................................................................ 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC6) ........................................................................................................ 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC6)..................................................................... 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC6).................................................................. 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6) .......................................................................................................... 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)...................................................... 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC5 and 6) ........................................... Warm-Up Counter Mode.....................................................................................................................
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1) High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6 10.3.7 10.3.8
118 119 119 122 124 125 128 130
10.3.8.1 10.3.8.2
11. Real-Time Clock (RTC)
11.1 11.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
RTC control registers .......................................................................................................................... Clock counter registers ....................................................................................................................... RTC counters 1 and 2......................................................................................................................... RTC counter monitor registers............................................................................................................ RTC counter 1 compare register ........................................................................................................ 141 141 141 142 144
11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4 11.2.5
iii
11.3
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Error measurement mode (RTCCR1) ............................................................... 145 Clock counter lock control (RTCCR1) ................................................................................ 150 RTCOUT pin output ............................................................................................................................ 152
11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.1 12.2 12.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Serial clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Clock source ....................................................................................................................................... 155 Shift edge............................................................................................................................................ 157
Leading edge Trailing edge Internal clock External clock 12.3.1.1 12.3.1.2 12.3.2.1 12.3.2.2
12.3.1 12.3.2
12.4 12.5 12.6
Number of bits to transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Number of words to transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Transfer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
4-bit and 8-bit transfer modes ............................................................................................................. 158 4-bit and 8-bit receive modes ............................................................................................................. 160 8-bit transfer / receive mode ............................................................................................................... 161
12.6.1 12.6.2 12.6.3
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART0 )
13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7 13.8 13.9 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Sampling Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STOP Bit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit/Receive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Transmit Operation .................................................................................................................... 168 Data Receive Operation ..................................................................................................................... 168 169 169 169 170 170 171
163 164 166 167 167 168 168 168
13.8.1 13.8.2
Status Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Parity Error.......................................................................................................................................... Framing Error...................................................................................................................................... Overrun Error ...................................................................................................................................... Receive Data Buffer Full..................................................................................................................... Transmit Data Buffer Empty ............................................................................................................... Transmit End Flag ..............................................................................................................................
13.9.1 13.9.2 13.9.3 13.9.4 13.9.5 13.9.6
14. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 14.8 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Sampling Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STOP Bit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit/Receive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 174 176 177 177 178 178 178
iv
14.9
14.8.1 14.8.2
Status Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Parity Error.......................................................................................................................................... Framing Error...................................................................................................................................... Overrun Error ...................................................................................................................................... Receive Data Buffer Full..................................................................................................................... Transmit Data Buffer Empty ............................................................................................................... Transmit End Flag .............................................................................................................................. 179 179 179 180 180 181
Data Transmit Operation .................................................................................................................... 178 Data Receive Operation ..................................................................................................................... 178
14.9.1 14.9.2 14.9.3 14.9.4 14.9.5 14.9.6
15. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
15.1 15.2 15.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
16. LCD Driver
16.1 16.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
LCD driving methods .......................................................................................................................... 187 Frame frequency................................................................................................................................. 188 Driving method for LCD driver ............................................................................................................ 189
When using the booster circuit (LCDCR="1") When using an external resistor divider (LCDCR="0")
16.2.1 16.2.2 16.2.3
16.3 16.4
16.2.3.1 16.2.3.2
LCD Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Control Method of LCD Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Initial setting ........................................................................................................................................ 193 Store of display data ........................................................................................................................... 193 Example of LCD drive output .............................................................................................................. 196 Display data setting ............................................................................................................................ 191 Blanking .............................................................................................................................................. 192
16.3.1 16.3.2
16.4.1 16.4.2 16.4.3
17. FLASH Memory
17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 17.5 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conditions for Accessing the FLASH Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differences among Product Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH Memory Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page Configuration ............................................................................................................................. 202 Configuration ...................................................................................................................................... Control ................................................................................................................................................ FLASH Write Enable Control (EEPCR) ............................................................................. FLASH Write Forcible Stop (EEPCR)................................................................................. Power Control for the FLASH Control Circuit......................................................................................
Software-based Power Control for the FLASH Control Circuit (EEPCR) Automatic Power Control for the FLASH Control Circuit (EEPCR) Method of Developing the Control Program in the RAM Area Method of Using Support Programs in the BOOT-ROM
201 201 202 202
17.4.1
Data Memory of FLASH(address 8000H to 81FFH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
204 205 207 207 208
17.5.1 17.5.2 17.5.3 17.5.4 17.5.5 17.5.6
17.5.5.1 17.5.5.2 17.5.6.1 17.5.6.2
Accessing the FLASH Data Memory Area.......................................................................................... 211
17.6
FLASH Program Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuration ...................................................................................................................................... Control ................................................................................................................................................ FLASH Write Enable Control (EEPCR) ............................................................................. FLASH Write Forcible Stop (EEPCR)................................................................................. 219 219 219 219
17.6.1 17.6.2 17.6.3 17.6.4
v
17.6.5 17.6.6
Power Control for the FLASH Control Circuit...................................................................................... 219 Accessing the FLASH Program Memory Area.................................................................................... 219
18. Input/Output Circuit
18.1 18.2 Control pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Input/Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
19. Electrical Characteristics
19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6 19.7 19.8 19.9 Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 DC Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer Counter 1 input (ECIN) Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCD Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oscillating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU mode.......................................................................................................................................... 224 Serial PROM mode ............................................................................................................................. 224
19.2.1 19.2.2
225 226 226 227 227 228 228
20. Package Dimensions
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit microcontroller series TLCS-870/C (LSI).
vi
TMP86FM26UG
CMOS 8-Bit Microcontroller
TMP86FM26UG
Product No. TMP86FM26UG ROM (FLASH) 32768 bytes RAM 1024 bytes Package LQFP64-P-1010-0.50E Emulation Chip TMP86C926XB
Note: Of the 32768 bytes of ROM (FLASH), 512 bytes can also be used as flash data memory.
1.1 Features
1. 8-bit single chip microcomputer TLCS-870/C series - Instruction execution time : 0.25 s (at 16 MHz) 122 s (at 32.768 kHz) - 132 types & 731 basic instructions 2. 21interrupt sources (External : 6 Internal : 15) 3. Input / Output ports (41 pins) Large current output: 23pins (Typ. 20mA), LED direct drive 4. Watchdog Timer 5. Prescaler - Time base timer - Divider output function 6. 18-bit Timer/Counter : 1ch - Timer Mode - Event Counter Mode - Pulse Width Measurement Mode - Frequency Measurement Mode 7. 8-bit timer counter : 4 ch - Timer, Event counter, Programmable divider output (PDO),
* The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023_D * TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. It is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most recent TOSHIBA products specifications. Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the "Handling Guide for Semiconductor Devices," or "TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook" etc. 021023_A * The TOSHIBA products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). These TOSHIBA products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunction or failure of which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury ("Unintended Usage"). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended Usage of TOSHIBA products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_B * The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_Q * The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No responsibility is assumed by TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patents or other rights of TOSHIBA or the third parties. 070122_C * The products described in this document are subject to foreign exchange and foreign trade control laws. 060925_E * For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3 of the chapter entitled Quality and Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
Page 1
1.1 Features
TMP86FM26UG
Pulse width modulation (PWM) output, Programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes 8. Real Time Clock : 1ch 9. 8-bit UART/SIO: 1 ch 10. 8-bit UART : 1 ch 11. Key-on wakeup : 4 ch 12. LCD driver/controller Built-in voltage booster for LCD driver With display memory LCD direct drive capability (MAX 32 seg x 4 com) 1/4,1/3,1/2duties or static drive are programmably selectable 13. Clock operation Single clock mode Dual clock mode 14. Low power consumption operation STOP mode: Oscillation stops. (Battery/Capacitor back-up.) SLOW1 mode: Low power consumption operation using low-frequency clock.(High-frequency clock stop.) SLOW2 mode: Low power consumption operation using low-frequency clock.(High-frequency clock oscillate.) IDLE0 mode: CPU stops, and only the Time-Based-Timer(TBT) on peripherals operate using high frequency clock. Release by falling edge of the source clock which is set by TBTCR. IDLE1 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high frequency clock. Release by interruputs(CPU restarts). IDLE2 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock. Release by interruputs. (CPU restarts). SLEEP0 mode: CPU stops, and only the Time-Based-Timer(TBT) on peripherals operate using low frequency clock.Release by falling edge of the source clock which is set by TBTCR. SLEEP1 mode: CPU stops, and peripherals operate using low frequency clock. Release by interruput.(CPU restarts). SLEEP2 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock. interruput. 15. Wide operation voltage:
2.7 V to 3.6 V at 16MHz /32.768 kHz 1.8 V to 3.6 V at 8 MHz /32.768 kHz
Release by
Page 2
TMP86FM26UG
1.2 Pin Assignment
VSS XIN XOUT TEST VDD (XTIN) P21 (XTOUT) P22
RESET
Figure 1-1 Pin Assignment
Page 3
(STOP/INT5) P20 (INT0) P60 (ECIN/INT1) P61 (ECNT/INT2) P62 (INT3) P63 (INT4/STOP2/SCK) P64 (BOOT/SI/STOP3/RXD0) P65 (SO/STOP4/TXD0) P66
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 V3 V2 V1 C1 C0 (DVO) P30 (TC3/PDO3/PWM3) P31 (TXD1/TC4/PDO4/PWM4/PPG4) P32 (RXD1/TC6/PDO6/PWM6/PPG6) P33
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 SEG6 SEG7 P77 (SEG8) P76 (SEG9) P75 (SEG10) P74 (SEG11) P73 (SEG12) P72 (SEG13) P71 (SEG14) P70 (SEG15) P57 (SEG16) P56 (SEG17) P55 (SEG18)
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
P54(SEG19) P53(SEG20) P52(SEG21) P51(SEG22) P50(SEG23) P17(SEG24) P16(SEG25) P15(SEG26) P14(SEG27) P13(SEG28) P12(SEG29) P11(SEG30) P10(SEG31) P24(RTCOUT) P23(RTCIN) P67(STOP5)
1.3 Block Diagram
TMP86FM26UG
1.3 Block Diagram
Figure 1-2 Block Diagram
Page 4
TMP86FM26UG
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
The TMP86FM26UG has MCU mode and serial PROM mode. Table 1-1 shows the pin functions in MCU mode. The serial PROM mode is explained later in a separate chapter. Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(1/3)
Pin Name P17 SEG24 P16 SEG25 P15 SEG26 P14 SEG27 P13 SEG28 P12 SEG29 P11 SEG30 P10 SEG31 P24 RTCOUT P23 RTCIN P22 XTOUT Pin Number 27 Input/Output IO O IO O IO O IO O IO I IO O IO O IO O IO O IO I IO O PORT17 LCD segment output 24 PORT16 LCD segment output 25 PORT15 LCD segment output 26 PORT14 LCD segment output 27 PORT13 LCD segment output 28 PORT12 LCD segment output 29 PORT11 LCD segment output 30 PORT10 LCD segment output 31 PORT24 RTC output PORT23 RTC input PORT22 Resonator connecting pins(32.768kHz) for inputting external clock PORT21 Resonator connecting pins(32.768kHz) for inputting external clock PORT20 External interrupt 5 input STOP mode release signal input PORT33 PDO6/PWM6/PPG6 output TC6 input UART data input 1 PORT32 PDO4/PWM4/PPG4 output TC4 input UART data output 1 PORT31 PDO3/PWM3 output TC3 input PORT30 Divider Output PORT57 LCD segment output 16 Functions
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
7
P21 XTIN P20
INT5 STOP
6
IO I IO I I IO O I I IO O I O IO O I IO O IO O
9
P33
PDO6/PWM6/PPG6
TC6 RXD1 P32
PDO4/PWM4/PPG4
64
TC4 TXD1 P31
PDO3/PWM3
63
62
TC3 P30
DVO
61
P57 SEG16
35
Page 5
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
TMP86FM26UG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(2/3)
Pin Name P56 SEG17 P55 SEG18 P54 SEG19 P53 SEG20 P52 SEG21 P51 SEG22 P50 SEG23 P67 STOP5 P66 TXD0 STOP4 SO P65 RXD0 STOP3 SI BOOT P64
SCK
Pin Number 34
Input/Output IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO I IO O I O IO I I I I IO I I I IO I IO I I IO I I IO I IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O PORT56 LCD segment output 17 PORT55 LCD segment output 18 PORT54 LCD segment output 19 PORT53 LCD segment output 20 PORT52 LCD segment output 21 PORT51 LCD segment output 22 PORT50 LCD segment output 23 PORT67 STOP5 input PORT66 UART data output 0 STOP4 input Serial Data Output
Functions
33
32
31
30
29
28
17
16
15
PORT65 UART data input 0 STOP3 input Serial Data Input Serial PROM mode control input PORT64 Serial Clock I/O STOP2 input External interrupt 4 input PORT63 External interrupt 3 input PORT62 External interrupt 2 input ECNT input PORT61 External interrupt 1 input ECIN input PORT60 External interrupt 0 input PORT77 LCD segment output 8 PORT76 LCD segment output 9 PORT75 LCD segment output 10 PORT74 LCD segment output 11 PORT73 LCD segment output 12
STOP2 INT4 P63 INT3 P62 INT2 ECNT P61 INT1 ECIN P60
INT0
14
13
12
11
10
P77 SEG8 P76 SEG9 P75 SEG10 P74 SEG11 P73 SEG12
43
42
41
40
39
Page 6
TMP86FM26UG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(3/3)
Pin Name P72 SEG13 P71 SEG14 P70 SEG15 SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG0 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 V3 V2 V1 C1 C0 XIN XOUT
RESET
Pin Number 38
Input/Output IO O IO O IO O O O O O O O O O O O O O I I I I I I O IO I I I I I PORT72 LCD segment output 13 PORT71 LCD segment output 14 PORT70 LCD segment output 15 LCD segment output 7 LCD segment output 6 LCD segment output 5 LCD segment output 4 LCD segment output 3 LCD segment output 2 LCD segment output 1 LCD segment output 0 LCD common output 3 LCD common output 2 LCD common output 1 LCD common output 0 LCD voltage booster pin LCD voltage booster pin LCD voltage booster pin LCD voltage booster pin LCD voltage booster pin
Functions
37
36 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 2 3 8 4 18 19 4 1
Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock Reset signal Test pin for out-going test. Normally, be fixed to low. Analog Base Voltage Input Pin for A/D Conversion Analog Power Supply Power Supply 0(GND)
TEST VAREF AVDD VDD VSS
Page 7
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
TMP86FM26UG
Page 8
TMP86FM26UG
2. Operational Description
2.1 CPU Core Functions
The CPU core consists of a CPU, a system clock controller, and an interrupt controller. This section provides a description of the CPU core, the program memory, the data memory, and the reset circuit.
2.1.1
Memory Address Map
The TMP86FM26UG memory is composed Flash, BOOTROM, RAM, DBR(Data buffer register) and SFR(Special function register). They are all mapped in 64-Kbyte address space. Figure 2-1 shows the TMP86FM26UG memory address map.
0000H
SFR
003FH 0040H
64 bytes
SFR:
RAM
043FH 0F80H
1024 bytes
RAM:
Special function register includes: I/O ports Peripheral control registers Peripheral status registers System control registers Program status word Random access memory includes: Data memory Stack
DBR:
DBR
0FFFH 3800H
128 bytes
Data buffer register includes: Peripheral control registers Peripheral status registers LCD display memory
BOOTROM
3FFFH 8000H
2048 bytes
BOOTROM:
Flash programming control program
Flash:
Program memory The area of 8000H to 81FFH can be also used as data memory of FLASH.
81FFH 8200H
Flash
FFB0H FFBFH FFC0H FFDFH FFE0H FFFFH
32768 bytes
Vector table for interrupts (16 bytes) Vector table for vector call instructions (32 bytes) Vector table for interrupts (32 bytes)
Figure 2-1 Memory Address Map 2.1.2 Program Memory (Flash)
The TMP86FM26UG has a 32768 bytes (Address 8000H to FFFFH) of program memory (Flash ). The area of 8000H to 81FFH can be used as a 512 bytes data memory of FLASH. Page 9
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FM26UG
2.1.3
Data Memory (RAM)
The TMP86FM26UG has 1024bytes (Address 0040H to 043FH) of internal RAM. The first 192 bytes (0040H to 00FFH) of the internal RAM are located in the direct area; instructions with shorten operations are available against such an area. The data memory contents become unstable when the power supply is turned on; therefore, the data memory should be initialized by an initialization routine.
Example :Clears RAM to "00H". (TMP86FM26UG)
LD LD LD SRAMCLR: LD INC DEC JRS HL, 0040H A, H BC, 03FFH (HL), A HL BC F, SRAMCLR ; Start address setup ; Initial value (00H) setup
2.2 System Clock Controller
The system clock controller consists of a clock generator, a timing generator, and a standby controller.
Timing generator control register Clock generator
XIN fc TBTCR 0036H
High-frequency clock oscillator
XOUT XTIN
Timing generator
fs
Standby controller
0038H SYSCR1 0039H SYSCR2
Low-frequency clock oscillator
XTOUT
System clocks Clock generator control
System control registers
Figure 2-2 System Colck Control 2.2.1 Clock Generator
The clock generator generates the basic clock which provides the system clocks supplied to the CPU core and peripheral hardware. It contains two oscillation circuits: One for the high-frequency clock and one for the low-frequency clock. Power consumption can be reduced by switching of the standby controller to low-power operation based on the low-frequency clock. The high-frequency (fc) clock and low-frequency (fs) clock can easily be obtained by connecting a resonator between the XIN/XOUT and XTIN/XTOUT pins respectively. Clock input from an external oscillator is also possible. In this case, external clock is applied to XIN/XTIN pin with XOUT/XTOUT pin not connected.
Page 10
TMP86FM26UG
High-frequency clock XIN XOUT XIN XOUT (Open) XTIN
Low-frequency clock XTOUT XTIN XTOUT (Open)
(a) Crystal/Ceramic resonator
(b) External oscillator
(c) Crystal
(d) External oscillator
Figure 2-3 Examples of Resonator Connection
Note:The function to monitor the basic clock directly at external is not provided for hardware, however, with disabling all interrupts and watchdog timers, the oscillation frequency can be adjusted by monitoring the pulse which the fixed frequency is outputted to the port by the program. The system to require the adjustment of the oscillation frequency should create the program for the adjustment in advance.
Page 11
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FM26UG
2.2.2
Timing Generator
The timing generator generates the various system clocks supplied to the CPU core and peripheral hardware from the basic clock (fc or fs). The timing generator provides the following functions. 1. Generation of main system clock 2. Generation of divider output (DVO) pulses 3. Generation of source clocks for time base timer 4. Generation of source clocks for watchdog timer 5. Generation of internal source clocks for timer/counters 6. Generation of warm-up clocks for releasing STOP mode 7. LCD
2.2.2.1
Configuration of timing generator
The timing generator consists of a 2-stage prescaler, a 21-stage divider, a main system clock generator, and machine cycle counters. An input clock to the 7th stage of the divider depends on the operating mode, SYSCR2 and TBTCR, that is shown in Figure 2-4. As reset and STOP mode started/canceled, the prescaler and the divider are cleared to "0".
fc or fs
Main system clock generator
SYSCK DV7CK
Machine cycle counters
High-frequency clock fc Low-frequency clock fs
12
fc/4
S A 123456 B Y
Divider
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 S B0 B1 A0 Y0 A1 Y1
Multiplexer
Multiplexer
Warm-up controller
Watchdog timer
Timer counter, Serial interface, Time-base-timer, divider output, etc. (Peripheral functions)
Figure 2-4 Configuration of Timing Generator
Page 12
TMP86FM26UG
Timing Generator Control Register
TBTCR (0036H) 7 (DVOEN) 6 (DVOCK) 5 4 DV7CK 3 (TBTEN) 2 1 (TBTCK) 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
DV7CK
Selection of input to the 7th stage of the divider
0: fc/28 [Hz] 1: fs
R/W
Note 1: In single clock mode, do not set DV7CK to "1". Note 2: Do not set "1" on DV7CK while the low-frequency clock is not operated stably. Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 4: In SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, the DV7CK setting is ineffective, and fs is input to the 7th stage of the divider. Note 5: When STOP mode is entered from NORMAL1/2 mode, the DV7CK setting is ineffective during the warm-up period after release of STOP mode, and the 6th stage of the divider is input to the 7th stage during this period.
2.2.2.2
Machine cycle
Instruction execution and peripheral hardware operation are synchronized with the main system clock. The minimum instruction execution unit is called an "machine cycle". There are a total of 10 different types of instructions for the TLCS-870/C Series: Ranging from 1-cycle instructions which require one machine cycle for execution to 10-cycle instructions which require 10 machine cycles for execution. A machine cycle consists of 4 states (S0 to S3), and each state consists of one main system clock.
1/fc or 1/fs [s]
Main system clock
State
S0
S1
S2
S3
S0
S1
S2
S3
Machine cycle
Figure 2-5 Machine Cycle 2.2.3 Operation Mode Control Circuit
The operation mode control circuit starts and stops the oscillation circuits for the high-frequency and lowfrequency clocks, and switches the main system clock. There are three operating modes: Single clock mode, dual clock mode and STOP mode. These modes are controlled by the system control registers (SYSCR1 and SYSCR2). Figure 2-6 shows the operating mode transition diagram.
Note 1: When the IDLE0/1/2 and SLEEP0/1/2 modes are started with the EEPCR = "0", the CPU wait period for stabilizing of the power supply of Flash control circuit is executed after being released from these mode. Note 2: When the STOP mode is started with the EEPCR = "1", the CPU wait period for stablizing of the power supply of flash control circuit is executed after the STOP warm-up time.
2.2.3.1
Single-clock mode
Only the oscillation circuit for the high-frequency clock is used, and P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) pins are used as input/output ports. The main-system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock. In the single-clock mode, the machine cycle time is 4/fc [s].
Page 13
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FM26UG
(1)
NORMAL1 mode In this mode, both the CPU core and on-chip peripherals operate using the high-frequency clock. The TMP86FM26UG is placed in this mode after reset.
(2)
IDLE1 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remains active. The CPU and the watchdog timer are halted; however on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the high-frequency clock). IDLE1 mode is started by SYSCR2 = "1", and IDLE1 mode is released to NORMAL1 mode by an interrupt request from the on-chip peripherals or external interrupt inputs. When the IMF (Interrupt master enable flag) is "1" (Interrupt enable), the execution will resume with the acceptance of the interrupt, and the operation will return to normal after the interrupt service is completed. When the IMF is "0" (Interrupt disable), the execution will resume with the instruction which follows the IDLE1 mode start instruction.
(3)
IDLE0 mode In this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation. This mode is enabled by SYSCR2 = "1". When IDLE0 mode starts, the CPU stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the peripheral circuits other than TBT. Then, upon detecting the falling edge of the source clock selected with TBTCR, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to all peripheral circuits. When returned from IDLE0 mode, the CPU restarts operating, entering NORMAL1 mode back again. IDLE0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how TBTCR is set. When IMF = "1", EF6 (TBT interrupt individual enable flag) = "1", and TBTCR = "1", interrupt processing is performed. When IDLE0 mode is entered while TBTCR = "1", the INTTBT interrupt latch is set after returning to NORMAL1 mode.
2.2.3.2
Dual-clock mode
Both the high-frequency and low-frequency oscillation circuits are used in this mode. P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) pins cannot be used as input/output ports. The main system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock in NORMAL2 and IDLE2 modes, and is obtained from the low-frequency clock in SLOW and SLEEP modes. The machine cycle time is 4/fc [s] in the NORMAL2 and IDLE2 modes, and 4/fs [s] (122 s at fs = 32.768 kHz) in the SLOW and SLEEP modes. The TLCS-870/C is placed in the signal-clock mode during reset. To use the dual-clock mode, the lowfrequency oscillator should be turned on at the start of a program. (1) NORMAL2 mode In this mode, the CPU core operates with the high-frequency clock. On-chip peripherals operate using the high-frequency clock and/or low-frequency clock. (2) SLOW2 mode In this mode, the CPU core operates with the low-frequency clock, while both the high-frequency clock and the low-frequency clock are operated. As the SYSCR2 becomes "1", the hardware changes into SLOW2 mode. As the SYSCR2 becomes "0", the hardware changes into NORMAL2 mode. As the SYSCR2 becomes "0", the hardware changes into SLOW1 mode. Do not clear SYSCR2 to "0" during SLOW2 mode.
Page 14
TMP86FM26UG
(3)
SLOW1 mode This mode can be used to reduce power-consumption by turning off oscillation of the high-frequency clock. The CPU core and on-chip peripherals operate using the low-frequency clock. Switching back and forth between SLOW1 and SLOW2 modes are performed by SYSCR2. In SLOW1 and SLEEP modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped.
(4)
IDLE2 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remain active. The CPU and the watchdog timer are halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the high-frequency clock and/or the low-frequency clock). Starting and releasing of IDLE2 mode are the same as for IDLE1 mode, except that operation returns to NORMAL2 mode.
(5)
SLEEP1 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit of the low-frequency clock remains active. The CPU, the watchdog timer, and the internal oscillation circuit of the high-frequency clock are halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the low-frequency clock). Starting and releasing of SLEEP mode are the same as for IDLE1 mode, except that operation returns to SLOW1 mode. In SLOW1 and SLEEP1 modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped.
(6)
SLEEP2 mode The SLEEP2 mode is the idle mode corresponding to the SLOW2 mode. The status under the SLEEP2 mode is same as that under the SLEEP1 mode, except for the oscillation circuit of the highfrequency clock.
(7)
SLEEP0 mode In this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation. This mode is enabled by setting "1" on bit SYSCR2. When SLEEP0 mode starts, the CPU stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the peripheral circuits other than TBT. Then, upon detecting the falling edge of the source clock selected with TBTCR, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to all peripheral circuits. When returned from SLEEP0 mode, the CPU restarts operating, entering SLOW1 mode back again. SLEEP0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how TBTCR is set. When IMF = "1", EF6 (TBT interrupt individual enable flag) = "1", and TBTCR = "1", interrupt processing is performed. When SLEEP0 mode is entered while TBTCR = "1", the INTTBT interrupt latch is set after returning to SLOW1 mode.
2.2.3.3
STOP mode
In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit is turned off, causing all system operations to be halted. The internal status immediately prior to the halt is held with a lowest power consumption during STOP mode. STOP mode is started by the system control register 1 (SYSCR1), and STOP mode is released by a inputting (Either level-sensitive or edge-sensitive can be programmably selected) to the STOP pin. After the warm-up period is completed, the execution resumes with the instruction which follows the STOP mode start instruction.
Page 15
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FM26UG
IDLE0 mode
Reset release
RESET
IDLE1 mode (a) Single-clock mode
Note 2 SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR1 = "1" SYSCR2 = "1" NORMAL1 mode Interrupt STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "0" SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR1 = "1" STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "1" STOP SYSCR2 = "1" SLOW2 mode Interrupt SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR2 = "0" SLOW1 mode SYSCR1 = "1" STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "1" SLEEP0 mode
IDLE2 mode
Interrupt
NORMAL2 mode
SYSCR2 = "0" SLEEP2 mode
SLEEP1 mode (b) Dual-clock mode
SYSCR2 = "1" Interrupt Note 2
Note 1: NORMAL1 and NORMAL2 modes are generically called NORMAL; SLOW1 and SLOW2 are called SLOW; IDLE0, IDLE1 and IDLE2 are called IDLE; SLEEP0, SLEEP1 and SLEEP2 are called SLEEP. Note 2: The mode is released by falling edge of TBTCR setting.
Figure 2-6 Operating Mode Transition Diagram
Table 2-1 Operating Mode and Conditions
Oscillator Operating Mode High Frequency Low Frequency CPU Core TBT Other Peripherals Reset Operate 4/fc [s] Machine Cycle Time
RESET NORMAL1 Single clock IDLE1 IDLE0 STOP NORMAL2 IDLE2 SLOW2 Dual clock SLEEP2 SLOW1 SLEEP1 SLEEP0 STOP Stop Stop Oscillation Stop Oscillation
Reset Operate Stop Halt
Reset
Operate
Halt Operate with high frequency
Halt
-
4/fc [s]
Oscillation
Halt Operate with low frequency Halt Operate with low frequency Operate
Operate
4/fs [s]
Halt Halt
Halt
-
Page 16
TMP86FM26UG
System Control Register 1
SYSCR1 (0038H) 7 STOP 6 RELM 5 RETM 4 OUTEN 3 WUT 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 00**)
STOP RELM RETM OUTEN
STOP mode start Release method for STOP mode Operating mode after STOP mode Port output during STOP mode
0: CPU core and peripherals remain active 1: CPU core and peripherals are halted (Start STOP mode) 0: Edge-sensitive release 1: Level-sensitive release 0: Return to NORMAL1/2 mode 1: Return to SLOW1 mode 0: High impedance 1: Output kept Return to NORMAL mode Return to SLOW mode 3 x 213/fs + (23/fs) 213/fs + (23/fs) 3 x 26/fs + (23/fs) 26/fs + (23/fs)
R/W R/W R/W R/W
WUT
Warm-up time at releasing STOP mode
00 01 10 11
3 x 216/fc + (210/fc) 216/fc + (210/fc) 3 x 214/fc + (210/fc) 214/fc + (210/fc)
R/W
Note 1: Always set RETM to "0" when transiting from NORMAL mode to STOP mode. Always set RETM to "1" when transiting from SLOW mode to STOP mode. Note 2: When STOP mode is released with RESET pin input, a return is made to NORMAL1 regardless of the RETM contents. Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don't care Note 4: Bits 1 and 0 in SYSCR1 are read as undefined data when a read instruction is executed. Note 5: As the hardware becomes STOP mode under OUTEN = "0", input value is fixed to "0"; therefore it may cause external interrupt request on account of falling edge. Note 6: When the key-on wakeup is used, RELM should be set to "1". Note 7: Port P20 is used as STOP pin. Therefore, when stop mode is started, OUTEN does not affect to P20, and P20 becomes High-Z mode. Note 8: The warmig-up time should be set correctly for using oscillator. Note 9: When the STOP mode is started with the EEPCR = "1", the CPU wait period for stabilizing of the power supply of flash control circuit is executed after the STOP warm-up time.(The CPU wait period for FLASH is shown in parentheses)
System Control Register 2
SYSCR2 (0039H) 7 XEN 6 XTEN 5 SYSCK 4 IDLE 3 2
TGHALT
1
0 (Initial value: 1000 *0**)
XEN XTEN
High-frequency oscillator control Low-frequency oscillator control Main system clock select (Write)/main system clock monitor (Read) CPU and watchdog timer control (IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes) TG control (IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes)
0: Turn off oscillation 1: Turn on oscillation 0: Turn off oscillation 1: Turn on oscillation 0: High-frequency clock (NORMAL1/NORMAL2/IDLE1/IDLE2) 1: Low-frequency clock (SLOW1/SLOW2/SLEEP1/SLEEP2) 0: CPU and watchdog timer remain active 1: CPU and watchdog timer are stopped (Start IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes) 0: Feeding clock to all peripherals from TG 1: Stop feeding clock to peripherals except TBT from TG. (Start IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes) R/W R/W
SYSCK
IDLE
TGHALT
Note 1: A reset is applied if both XEN and XTEN are cleared to "0", XEN is cleared to "0" when SYSCK = "0", or XTEN is cleared to "0" when SYSCK = "1". Note 2: *: Don't care, TG: Timing generator, *; Don't care Note 3: Bits 3, 1 and 0 in SYSCR2 are always read as undefined value. Note 4: Do not set IDLE and TGHALT to "1" simultaneously. Note 5: Because returning from IDLE0/SLEEP0 to NORMAL1/SLOW1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period of IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode might be shorter than the period setting by TBTCR. Note 6: When IDLE1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode is released, IDLE is automatically cleared to "0".
Page 17
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FM26UG
Note 7: When IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode is released, TGHALT is automatically cleared to "0". Note 8: Before setting TGHALT to "1", be sure to stop peripherals. If peripherals are not stopped, the interrupt latch of peripherals may be set after IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode is released.
2.2.4
Operating Mode Control
STOP mode
STOP mode is controlled by the system control register 1, the STOP pin input and key-on wakeup input (STOP5 to STOP2) which is controlled by the STOP mode release control register (STOPCR). The STOP pin is also used both as a port P20 and an INT5 (external interrupt input 5) pin. STOP mode is started by setting SYSCR1 to "1". During STOP mode, the following status is maintained. 1. Oscillations are turned off, and all internal operations are halted. 2. The data memory, registers, the program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before STOP mode was entered. 3. The prescaler and the divider of the timing generator are cleared to "0". 4. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction (e.g., [SET (SYSCR1).7]) which started STOP mode. STOP mode includes a level-sensitive mode and an edge-sensitive mode, either of which can be selected with the SYSCR1. Do not use any key-on wakeup input (STOP5 to STOP2) for releasing STOP mode in edge-sensitive mode. When the STOP mode is started with the EEPCR = "1", the CPU wait for stabilizing of the power supply of flash control circuit is executed after the STOP warm-up time.
Note 1: The STOP mode can be released by either the STOP or key-on wakeup pin (STOP5 to STOP2). However, because the STOP pin is different from the key-on wakeup and can not inhibit the release input, the STOP pin must be used for releasing STOP mode. Note 2: During STOP period (from start of STOP mode to end of warm up), due to changes in the external interrupt pin signal, interrupt latches may be set to "1" and interrupts may be accepted immediately after STOP mode is released. Before starting STOP mode, therefore, disable interrupts. Also, before enabling interrupts after STOP mode is released, clear unnecessary interrupt latches.
2.2.4.1
(1)
Level-sensitive release mode (RELM = "1") In this mode, STOP mode is released by setting the STOP pin high or setting the STOP5 to STOP2 pin input which is enabled by STOPCR. This mode is used for capacitor backup when the main power supply is cut off and long term battery backup. Even if an instruction for starting STOP mode is executed while STOP pin input is high or STOP5
to STOP2 input is low, STOP mode does not start but instead the warm-up sequence starts immediately. Thus, to start STOP mode in the level-sensitive release mode, it is necessary for the program to first confirm that the STOP pin input is low or STOP5 to STOP2 input is high. The following two methods can be used for confirmation. 1. Testing a port. 2. Using an external interrupt input INT5 (INT5 is a falling edge-sensitive input).
Page 18
TMP86FM26UG
Example 1 :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode by testing a port P20.
LD SSTOPH: TEST JRS DI SET (SYSCR1). 7 (SYSCR1), 01010000B (P2PRD). 0 F, SSTOPH ; IMF 0 ; Starts STOP mode ; Sets up the level-sensitive release mode ; Wait until the STOP pin input goes low level
Example 2 :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode with an INT5 interrupt.
PINT5: TEST JRS LD DI SET SINT5: RETI (SYSCR1). 7 (P2PRD). 0 F, SINT5 (SYSCR1), 01010000B ; To reject noise, STOP mode does not start if port P20 is at high ; Sets up the level-sensitive release mode. ; IMF 0 ; Starts STOP mode
Only when EEPCR is "1". (The CPU wait period is added.) STOP pin XOUT pin STOP operation Confirm by program that the STOP pin input is low and start STOP mode. Warm up VIH
NORMAL operation
CPU NORMAL operation Wait STOP mode is released by the hardware. Always released if the STOP pin input is high.
Figure 2-7 Level-sensitive Release Mode
Note 1: Even if the STOP pin input is low after warm-up start, the STOP mode is not restarted. Note 2: In this case of changing to the level-sensitive mode from the edge-sensitive mode, the release mode is not switched until a rising edge of the STOP pin input is detected. Note 3: When the STOP mode is started with the EEPCR = "1", the CPU wait period for stablizing of the power supply of flash control circuit is executed after the STOP warm-up time.
(2)
Edge-sensitive release mode (RELM = "0") In this mode, STOP mode is released by a rising edge of the STOP pin input. This is used in applications where a relatively short program is executed repeatedly at periodic intervals. This periodic signal (for example, a clock from a low-power consumption oscillator) is input to the STOP pin. In the edge-sensitive release mode, STOP mode is started even when the STOP pin input is high level. Do not use any STOP5 to STOP2 pin input for releasing STOP mode in edge-sensitive release mode.
Example :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode
DI LD (SYSCR1), 10010000B ; IMF 0 ; Starts after specified to the edge-sensitive release mode
Page 19
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FM26UG
Only when EEPCR is "1". (The CPU wait period is added.) STOP pin XOUT pin
VIH
NORMAL operation
STOP mode started by the program.
STOP operation
Warm up
CPU Wait
NORMAL operation
STOP operation
STOP mode is released by the hardware at the rising edge of STOP pin input.
Figure 2-8 Edge-sensitive Release Mode
Note 1: When the STOP mode is started with the EEPCR = "1", the CPU wait period for stablizing of the power supply of flash control circuit is executed after the STOP warm-up time.
STOP mode is released by the following sequence. 1. In the dual-clock mode, when returning to NORMAL2, both the high-frequency and lowfrequency clock oscillators are turned on; when returning to SLOW1 mode, only the lowfrequency clock oscillator is turned on. In the single-clock mode, only the high-frequency clock oscillator is turned on. 2. A warm-up period is inserted to allow oscillation time to stabilize. During warm up, all internal operations remain halted. Four different warm-up times can be selected with the SYSCR1 in accordance with the resonator characteristics. 3. When the EEPCR is "1", the CPU wait period is inserted to stabilize the power supply of flash control circuit. During CPU wait, though CPU operations remain halted, the peripheral function operation is resumed, and the counting of the timing generator is restarted. After the CPU wait is finished, normal operation resumes with the instruction following the STOP mode start instruction. 4. When the EEPCR is "0", normal operation resumes with the instruction following the STOP mode start instruction after the STOP warm up.
Note 1: When the STOP mode is released, the start is made after the prescaler and the divider of the timing generator are cleared to "0". Note 2: STOP mode can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin, which immediately performs the normal reset operation. Note 3: When STOP mode is released with a low hold voltage, the following cautions must be observed. The power supply voltage must be at the operating voltage level before releasing STOP mode. The RESET pin input must also be "H" level, rising together with the power supply voltage. In this case, if an external time constant circuit has been connected, the RESET pin input voltage will increase at a slower pace than the power supply voltage. At this time, there is a danger that a reset may occur if input voltage level of the RESET pin drops below the non-inverting high-level input voltage (Hysteresis input).
Table 2-2 Warm-up Time Example (at fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Warm-up Time [ms] WUT Return to NORMAL Mode 00 01 10 11 12.288 + (0.064) 4.096 + (0.064) 3.072 + (0.064) 1.024 + (0.064) Return to SLOW Mode 750 + (0.244) 250 + (0.244) 5.85 + (0.244) 1.95 + (0.244)
Note 1: The warm-up time is obtained by dividing the basic clock by the divider. Therefore, the warm-up time may include a certain amount of error if there is any fluctuation of the oscillation frequency when STOP mode is released. Thus, the warm-up time must be considered as an approximate value. Note 2: The CPU wait period for FLASH is shown in parentheses.
Page 20
Turn off
Oscillator circuit
Turn on
Main system clock a+3 SET (SYSCR1). 7 n+1 (a) STOP mode start (Example: Start with SET (SYSCR1). 7 instruction located at address a) n+2 n+3 n+4 Halt
Program counter
a+2
Instruction execution
Divider
n
0
Figure 2-9 STOP Mode Start/Release (when EEPCR = "0")
a+4
Instruction address a + 2
Page 21
0 1 (b) STOP mode release
Warm up
STOP pin input
Oscillator circuit
Turn off
Turn on
Main system clock a+5
Instruction address a + 3
Program counter
a+3
a+6
Instruction address a + 4
Instruction execution
Halt
Divider
0
Count up
2
3
TMP86FM26UG
2.2 System Clock Controller
2. Operational Description
Turn off
Oscillator circuit
Turn on
Main system clock a+3 SET (SYSCR1). 7 n+1 n+2 n+3 n+4 Halt
Program counter
a+2
Instruction execution
Divider
n
0
(a) STOP mode start (Example: Start with SET (SYSCR1). 7 instruction located at address a)
Figure 2-10 STOP Mode Start/Release (when EEPCR = "1")
CPU Wait a+4
Instruction address a + 2
Page 22
0 1 m The counting of divider is restarted. (b) STOP mode release
Warm up
STOP pin input
Oscillator circuit
Turn off
Turn on
Main system clock a+5
Instruction address a + 3
Program counter
a+3
Instruction execution
Halt
TMP86FM26UG
Divider
0
Count up
m+1
m+2
TMP86FM26UG
2.2.4.2
IDLE1/2 mode and SLEEP1/2 mode
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2) and maskable interrupts. The following status is maintained during these modes. 1. Operation of the CPU and watchdog timer (WDT) is halted. On-chip peripherals continue to operate. 2. The data memory, CPU registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before these modes were entered. 3. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction which starts these modes.
Starting IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes by instruction
CPU and WDT are halted
Yes Reset input No No Interrupt request Yes "1" EEPCR "0" CPU Wait
Reset
"0"
IMF "1" (Interrupt release mode) Interrupt processing
Normal release mode
Execution of the instruction which follows the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start instruction
Figure 2-11 IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes
Note 1: EEPCR is a bit1 in EEPCR, which is a control bit of the power supply circuit for flash. Note 2: During CPU wait, though CPU operations remain halted, the peripheral function operation is resumed. Therefore in this time, though the interrupt latch might be set, interrupt operation is not executed until the CPU wait is finished.
Page 23
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FM26UG
* Start the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes After IMF is set to "0", set the individual interrupt enable flag (EF) which releases IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes. To start IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, set SYSCR2 to "1". * Release the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode. These modes are selected by interrupt master enable flag (IMF). After releasing IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, the SYSCR2 is automatically cleared to "0" and the operation mode is returned to the mode preceding IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes. When the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are started with the EEPCR = "0", the CPU wait period for stabilizing of the power supply of flash control circuit is added before the operation mode is returned to the preceding modes. The CPU wait time of IDLE1/2 is 210/fc [s] and that of SLEEP1/2 mode is 23/fs [s]. IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode. (1) Normal release mode (IMF = "0") IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled by the individual interrupt enable flag (EF). After the interrupt is generated, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start instruction. Normally, the interrupt latches (IL) of the interrupt source used for releasing must be cleared to "0" by load instructions. (2) Interrupt release mode (IMF = "1") IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled with the individual interrupt enable flag (EF) and the interrupt processing is started. After the interrupt is processed, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the instruction, which starts IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes.
Note: When a watchdog timer interrupts is generated immediately before IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes will not be started.
Page 24
Main system clock
Interrupt request a+2 SET (SYSCR2). 4 Operate Halt a+3
Program counter
Instruction execution
Watchdog timer
(a) IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start (Example: Starting with the SET instruction located at address a)
Main system clock
Interrupt request a+3 Instruction address a + 2 Operate Normal release mode a+4
Program counter
Figure 2-12 IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes Start/Release (when EEPCR = "1")
Page 25
a+3 Acceptance of interrupt Operate Operate Interrupt release mode
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
Main system clock
Interrupt request
Program counter
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
TMP86FM26UG
(b) IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes release
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FM26UG
2.2.4.3
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes (IDLE0, SLEEP0)
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2) and the time base timer control register (TBTCR). The following status is maintained during IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes. 1. Timing generator stops feeding clock to peripherals except TBT. 2. The data memory, CPU registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes were entered. 3. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction which starts IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes.
Note: Before starting IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, be sure to stop (Disable) peripherals.
Page 26
TMP86FM26UG
Stopping peripherals by instruction
Starting IDLE0, SLEEP0 modes by instruction
CPU and WDT are halted
Reset input No No TBT source clock falling edge Yes
Yes
Reset
"1"
EEPCR "0" CPU Wait
No
TBTCR = "1" Yes TBT interrupt enable Yes
No
(Normal release mode) "0"
IMF "1" (Interrupt release mode) Interrupt processing
Execution of the instruction which follows the IDLE0, SLEEP0 modes start instruction
Figure 2-13 IDLE0 and SLEEP0 Modes
Page 27
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FM26UG
* Start the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes Stop (Disable) peripherals such as a timer counter. To start IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes, set SYSCR2 to "1". * Release the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode. These modes are selected by interrupt master flag (IMF), the individual interrupt enable flag of TBT and TBTCR. After releasing IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes, the SYSCR2 is automatically cleared to "0" and the operation mode is returned to the mode preceding IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes. Before starting the IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, when the TBTCR is set to "1", INTTBT interrupt latch is set to "1". When the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are started with the EEPCR = "0", the CPU wait period for stabilizing of the power supply of flash control circuit is added before the operation mode is returned to the preceding modes. The CPU wait time of IDLE0 is 210/fc [s] and that of SLEEP0 mode is 23/fs [s]. IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
Note: IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start/release without reference to TBTCR setting.
(1)
Normal release mode (IMF*EF6*TBTCR = "0") IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the TBTCR. After the falling edge is detected, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start instruction. Before starting the IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, when the TBTCR is set to "1", INTTBT interrupt latch is set to "1".
(2)
Interrupt release mode (IMF*EF6*TBTCR = "1") IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the TBTCR and INTTBT interrupt processing is started.
Note 1: Because returning from IDLE0, SLEEP0 to NORMAL1, SLOW1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period of IDLE0, SLEEP0 mode might be the shorter than the period setting by TBTCR. Note 2: When a watchdog timer interrupt is generated immediately before IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode is started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode will not be started.
Page 28
Main system clock
Interrupt request a+2 a+3
Program counter
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 2
Halt
Watchdog timer
Operate
(a) IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start (Example: Starting with the SET instruction located at address a
Main system clock
TBT clock a+3 a+4
Program counter
Figure 2-14 IDLE0 and SLEEP0 Modes Start/Release (when EEPCR = "1")
Page 29
Instruction address a + 2 Operate
Normal release mode a+3
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
Main system clock
TBT clock
Program counter
Instruction execution
Halt
Acceptance of interrupt Operate
Interrupt release mode
(b) IDLE and SLEEP0 modes release
TMP86FM26UG
Watchdog timer
Halt
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FM26UG
2.2.4.4
SLOW mode
SLOW mode is controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2). The following is the methods to switch the mode with the warm-up counter. (1) Switching from NORMAL2 mode to SLOW1 mode First, set SYSCR2 to switch the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for SLOW2 mode. Next, clear SYSCR2 to turn off high-frequency oscillation.
Note: The high-frequency clock can be continued oscillation in order to return to NORMAL2 mode from SLOW mode quickly. Always turn off oscillation of high-frequency clock when switching from SLOW mode to stop mode.
When the low-frequency clock oscillation is unstable, wait until oscillation stabilizes before performing the above operations. The timer/counter (TC4,TC3) can conveniently be used to confirm that low-frequency clock oscillation has stabilized.
Example 1 :Switching from NORMAL2 mode to SLOW1 mode.
SET (SYSCR2). 5 ; SYSCR2 1 (Switches the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for SLOW2) CLR (SYSCR2). 7 ; SYSCR2 0 (Turns off high-frequency oscillation)
Example 2 :Switching to the SLOW1 mode after low-frequency clock has stabilized.
SET LD LD LDW DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR SET (TC4CR). 3 (SYSCR2). 5 ; Stops TC4, 3 ; SYSCR2 1 (Switches the main system clock to the low-frequency clock) CLR (SYSCR2). 7 ; SYSCR2 0 (Turns off high-frequency oscillation) RETI : VINTTC4: DW PINTTC4 ; INTTC4 vector table (TC4CR). 3 (EIRE). 1 (SYSCR2). 6 (TC3CR), 43H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG3), 8000H ; SYSCR2 1 ; Sets mode for TC4, 3 (16-bit mode, fs for source) ; Sets warming-up counter mode ; Sets warm-up time (Depend on oscillator accompanied) ; IMF 0 ; Enables INTTC4 ; IMF 1 ; Starts TC4, 3
Page 30
TMP86FM26UG
(2)
Switching from SLOW1 mode to NORMAL2 mode First, set SYSCR2 to turn on the high-frequency oscillation. When time for stabilization (Warm up) has been taken by the timer/counter (TC4,TC3), clear SYSCR2 to switch the main system clock to the high-frequency clock. SLOW mode can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
Note: After SYSCK is cleared to "0", executing the instructions is continiued by the low-frequency clock for the period synchronized with low-frequency and high-frequency clocks.
High-frequency clock Low-frequency clock Main system clock SYSCK
Example :Switching from the SLOW1 mode to the NORMAL2 mode (fc = 16 MHz, warm-up time is 4.0 ms).
SET LD LD LD DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR CLR (TC4CR). 3 (SYSCR2). 5 ; Stops TC4, 3 ; SYSCR2 0 (Switches the main system clock to the high-frequency clock) RETI : VINTTC4: DW PINTTC4 ; INTTC4 vector table (TC4CR). 3 (EIRE). 1 (SYSCR2). 7 (TC3CR), 63H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG4), 0F8H ; SYSCR2 1 (Starts high-frequency oscillation) ; Sets mode for TC4, 3 (16-bit mode, fc for source) ; Sets warming-up counter mode ; Sets warm-up time ; IMF 0 ; Enables INTTC4 ; IMF 1 ; Starts TC4, 3
Page 31
2.2 System Clock Controller
2. Operational Description
Highfrequency clock Lowfrequency clock Main system clock Turn off
SYSCK
XEN CLR (SYSCR2). 7 SLOW2 mode (a) Switching to the SLOW mode
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 5
NORMAL2 mode
SLOW1 mode
Figure 2-15 Switching between the NORMAL2 and SLOW Modes
Page 32
CLR (SYSCR2). 5 Warm up during SLOW2 mode (b) Switching to the NORMAL2 mode
Highfrequency clock Lowfrequency clock Main system clock
SYSCK
XEN
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 7
TMP86FM26UG
SLOW1 mode
NORMAL2 mode
TMP86FM26UG
2.3 Reset Circuit
The TMP86FM26UG has five types of reset generation procedures: An external reset input, an address trap reset, a watchdog timer reset and a system clock reset. Of these reset, the address trap reset, the watchdog timer and the system clock reset are a malfunction reset. When the malfunction reset request is detected, reset occurs during the maximum 24/fc[s]. Also a reset circuit has an 11-stage counter for generation of flash reset, and the flash reset occurs immediately after the malfunction reset and the external reset operation. The flash reset period is 210/fc [s] (64s at 16.0MHz). Therefore, the maximum reset period is 24/fc [s] + 210/fc [s] (65.5s at 16.0MHz). The malfunction reset circuit such as watchdog timer reset, address trap reset and system clock reset is not initialized when power is turned on. Therefore, reset may occur during maximum 24/fc + 210/fc[s] (65.5s at 16.0 MHz) when power is turned on. Table 2-3 shows on-chip hardware initialization by reset action. Table 2-3 Initializing Internal Status by Reset Action
On-chip Hardware Program counter Stack pointer General-purpose registers (W, A, B, C, D, E, H, L, IX, IY) Jump status flag Zero flag Carry flag Half carry flag Sign flag Overflow flag Interrupt master enable flag Interrupt individual enable flags Interrupt latches (JF) (ZF) (CF) (HF) (SF) (VF) (IMF) (EF) (IL) (PC) (SP) Initial Value (FFFEH) Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Output latches of I/O ports Not initialized Not initialized 0 0 Control registers 0 LCD data buffer RAM Refer to each of control register Not initialized Not initialized Refer to I/O port circuitry Watchdog timer Enable Prescaler and divider of timing generator 0 On-chip Hardware Initial Value
2.3.1
External Reset Input
The RESET pin contains a Schmitt trigger (Hysteresis) with an internal pull-up resistor. When the RESET pin is held at "L" level for at least 3 machine cycles (12/fc [s]) with the power supply voltage within the operating voltage range and oscillation stable, a reset is applied and the internal state is initialized. When the high level goes on during 210/fc[s] (65.5s at 16MHz) after the RESET pin input goes high, the reset operation is released and the program execution starts at the vector address stored at addresses FFFEH to FFFFH.
Page 33
2. Operational Description
2.3 Reset Circuit TMP86FM26UG
VDD Flash reset counter RESET Internal reset Watchdog timer reset Malfunction reset output circuit Address trap reset System clock reset Clock stop detection reset
Figure 2-16 Reset Circuit 2.3.2 Address trap reset
If the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (when WDTCR1 is set to "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap reset will be generated. The reset time is maximum 24/fc + 210/fc[s] (65.5s at 16.0 MHz).
Note:The operating mode under address trapped is alternative of reset or interrupt. The address trap area is alternative.
Instruction execution Internal reset
JP a Address trap is occurred
Reset release
Instruction at address r
maximum 24/fc + 210/fc [s]
4/fc to 12/fc [s]
16/fc [s]
Note 1: Address "a" is in the SFR, DBR or on-chip RAM (WDTCR1 = "1") space. Note 2: During reset release, reset vector "r" is read out, and an instruction at address "r" is fetched and decoded.
Figure 2-17 Address Trap Reset 2.3.3 Watchdog timer reset
Refer to Section "Watchdog Timer".
2.3.4
System clock reset
If the condition as follows is detected, the system clock reset occurs automatically to prevent dead lock of the CPU. (The oscillation is continued without stopping.) - In case of clearing SYSCR2 and SYSCR2 simultaneously to "0". - In case of clearing SYSCR2 to "0", when the SYSCR2 is "0". - In case of clearing SYSCR2 to "0", when the SYSCR2 is "1". The flash reset occurs immediately after the system clock reset operation. The reset time is maximum 24/fc + 2 /fc (65.5 s at 16.0 MHz).
10
Page 34
TMP86FM26UG
2.3.5
Clock Stop Detection Reset
Refer to Section "Clock Stop Detection Circuit".
2.3.6
Internal Reset Detection Flags
After an internal reset is released, the cause of this internal reset can be identified by reading the internal reset detection flag register (IRSCR). IRSCR corresponds to system clock reset, IRSCR to address trap reset, IRSCR to watchdog timer reset, and IRSCR to clock stop detection reset. Each of these bits is set to "1" when the corresponding reset is generated. To clear IRSCR to "0", write "1" in IRSCR or set the RESET pin (external reset) to "L" level.
Internal Reset Detection Flag Register
IRSCR (0FB5H) 7 FCLR 6 5 4 3 SYSRSF 2 ADTRF 1 WDTF 0 CLKSF (Initial value: 0*** 0000)
FCLR SYSRSF ADTRF WDTF CLKSF
Flag initialization control System clock reset flag Address trap reset flag Watchdog timer reset flag Clock stop detection reset flag
0: 1: Clear SYSRSF, ADTRF, WDTF, and CLKSF flags to "0". 0: System clock reset not detected 1: System clock reset detected 0: Address trap reset not detected 1: Address trap reset detected 0: Watchdog timer reset not detected 1: Watchdog timer reset detected 0: Clock stop detection reset not detected 1: Clock stop detection reset detected
R/W
Read only
Note 1: FCLR is automatically cleared to "0" after being set to "1". Note 2: SYSRSF, ADTRF, WDTF, and CLKSF are not initialized by an internal reset. To initialize these flags, write "1" in FCLR or set the RESET pin (external reset) to "L" level.
Page 35
2. Operational Description
2.4 Clock Stop Detection Circuit TMP86FM26UG
2.4 Clock Stop Detection Circuit
The clock stop detection circuit generates a clock stop detection reset if either one of the high-frequency and lowfrequency clocks stopped or became unstable. A clock stop detection reset is generated when the frequency ratio of the high-frequency clock to the low-frequency clock goes out of the range specified by the maximum and minimum values. This reset is released when the frequency ratio returns to the specified range again.
2.4.1
Configuration
High-frequency clock fc Low-frequency clock fs Enable 8 Write enable 8 CLKSCR CLKSMN CLKSMX 8
Clock stop detection circuit
Reset request
Decoder
Figure 2-18 Configuration of Clock Stop Detection Circuit 2.4.2 Control
The clock stop detection circuit is controlled by the clock stop detection control register (CLKSCR), the clock stop minimum value compare register (CLKSMN), and the clock stop maximum value compare register (CLKSMX). Clock Stop Detection Control Register
CLKSCR (0FB6H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
CLKSCR
Clock stop detection circuit operation control
00H: Disable E4H: Enable Others: Reserved
R/W
Note 1: When SYSCR2 is set to "0", CLKSCR is automatically cleared to "00H" to disable clock stop detection. Note 2: When STOP, IDLE0, or SLEEP0 mode is started, CLKSCR is automatically cleared to "00H" to disable clock stop detection. Note 3: CLKSCR can be set to "E4H" only when both SYSCR2 and SYSCR2 are "1". When either SYSCR2 or SYSCR2 is "0", any attempt to change CLKSCR from "00H" to "E4H" is ineffective. Note 4: CLKSCR is not initialized by an internal reset. To initialize this register, set the RESET pin (external reset) to "L" level. Note 5: When SYSCR2 = "1" and CLKSCR = "E4H", the low-frequency clock continues oscillating even if SYSCR2 is set to "0" or even if an internal reset is generated. (Dual-clock operation continues during reset operation and after reset release.)
Clock Stop Minimun Value Compare Register
CLKSMN (0FB7H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Page 36
TMP86FM26UG
Clock Stop Maximun Value Compare Register
CLKSMX (0FB8H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: CLKSMN and CLKSMX cannot be written while the clock stop detection circuit is enabled. If these registers are written while clock stop detection is enabled, the values written to these registers are not reflected. Note 2: Set CLKSMN and CLKSMX according to the clock frequencies to be used. At this time, make sure that CLKSMN is smaller than CLKSMX. For how to calculate the values to be set in these registers, see "2.4.2.1 Setting the minimum and maximum values for clock stop detection" below. Note 3: CLKSMN and CLKSMX are not initialized by an internal reset. To initialize these registers, set the RESET pin (external reset) to "L" level.
2.4.2.1
Setting the minimum and maximum values for clock stop detection
The CLKSMN and CLKSMX registers are used to determine a clock stop/unstable condition. The values to be set in CLKSMN and CLKSMX are respectively obtained by calculating the minimum and maximum values of the frequency ratio of the high-frequency clock (fc) to the low-frequency clock (fs) including deviation. Basically, CLKSMN should be set to the minimum value of the frequency ratio divided by four (fractions to be dropped), and CLKSMX should be set to the maximum value of the frequency ratio divided by four (fractions to be rounded up). The equations for obtaining the CLKSMN and CLKSMX values and example settings are shown below.
Page 37
2. Operational Description
2.4 Clock Stop Detection Circuit TMP86FM26UG
(Equations)
fc x ( 1 - ( f ) fc ) CLKSMN value = ---------------------------------------------------fs x ( 1 + ( f ) fs ) x 4 fc x 1 + ( f ) fc CLKSMX value = ---------------------------------------------------fs x ( 1 - ( f ) fs ) x 4
(Fractions to be dropped)
(Fractions to be rounded up)
fc f/fc fs f/fs
: High-frequency clock frequency : High-frequency clock frequency deviation : Low-frequency clock frequency : Low-frequency clock frequency deviation
(Setting Examples)
Conditions fc f/fc fs f/fs : 8 MHz : 10% : 32.768 MHz : 1%
8 x 10 x ( 1 - 0.1 ) CLKSMN value = ---------------------------------------------------------------------3 32.768 x 10 x ( 1 + 0.01 ) x 4 (Nearly Equal) = 54 (36H) 8 x 10 x ( 1 + 0.1 ) CLKSMX value = ---------------------------------------------------------------------3 32.768 x 10 x ( 1 - 0.01 ) x 4 (Nearly Equal) = 68 (44H)
6
6
When the clock stop detection circuit is enabled, even a slight deviation from the clock frequency ratio range set by CLKSMN and CLKSMX will generate a clock stop detection reset. Therefore, be sure to allow sufficient margins when setting the CLKSMN and CLKSMX values. CLKSMN and CLKSMX cannot be written when the clock stop detection circuit is enabled. These registers must be set before the clock stop detection circuit is enabled. CLKSMN and CLKSMX are not initialized by an internal reset. To initialize these registers, set the RESET pin (external reset) to "L" level.
2.4.2.2
Enabling/Disabling the clock stop detection circuit
The clock stop detection circuit is enabled by writing "E4H" in CLKSCR and it is disabled by writing "00H" in CLKSCR. Only when SYSCR2 = "1" and SYSCR2 = "1" can CLKSCR be written. In addition, make sure that the high-frequency and low-frequency clocks are oscillating stably before writing to CLKSCR. When STOP, IDLE0, or SLEEP0 mode is started while the clock stop detection circuit is enabled, CLKSCR is cleared to "00H" and the clock stop detection circuit is disabled. To enable the clock stop detection circuit again after STOP, IDLE0, or SLEEP0 mode is exited, write "E4H" in CLKSCR. While the clock stop detection circuit is enabled, setting SYSCR2 to "0" also clears CLKSCR to "00H". Page 38
TMP86FM26UG
CLKSCR is not cleared by an internal reset. To initialize this register, set the RESET pin (external reset) to "L" level.
2.4.2.3
Generating and releasing a reset
When a clock stop condition is detected, a clock stop detection reset is generated not immediately but after two rising edges of the low-frequency clock. Therefore, the reset generation timing of the clock stop detection reset differs between the high-frequency clock and the low-frequency clock. When the high-frequency clock stops and the frequency ratio goes out of the range specified by CLKSMN and CLKSMX, a clock stop detection reset is generated after two rising edges of the low-frequency clock. During the reset, the clock stop detection operation continues. The reset is released when the clock resumes stable operation and the frequency ratio returns to the specified range again. When a stop condition is detected in the low-frequency clock, a clock stop detection reset is generated only after the low-frequency clock resumes oscillation and the second rising edge of the low-frequency clock is detected. This means that no reset will be generated if the low-frequency clock stops completely. The clock stop detection reset is followed by a flash reset. The maximum reset period is 24/fc + 210/fc [s] (65.5 s at 16.0 MHz).
Note: If the high-frequency or low-frequency clock temporarily goes out of the specified frequency ratio range due to such causes as noise, a clock stop detection reset is also generated.
When the high-frequency clock stops
High-frequency clock Stable Low-frequency clock Stable Stop Stable
Reset signal
When the low-frequency clock stops
High-frequency clock Stable Low-frequency clock Stable Stop Stable
Reset signal
Figure 2-19 Clock Stop Detection Timing
Page 39
2. Operational Description
2.4 Clock Stop Detection Circuit TMP86FM26UG
Page 40
TMP86FM26UG
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
The TMP86FM26UG has a total of 21 interrupt sources excluding reset. Interrupts can be nested with priorities. Four of the internal interrupt sources are non-maskable while the rest are maskable. Interrupt sources are provided with interrupt latches (IL), which hold interrupt requests, and independent vectors. The interrupt latch is set to "1" by the generation of its interrupt request which requests the CPU to accept its interrupts. Interrupts are enabled or disabled by software using the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and interrupt enable flag (EF). If more than one interrupts are generated simultaneously, interrupts are accepted in order which is dominated by hardware. However, there are no prioritized interrupt factors among non-maskable interrupts.
Interrupt Latch - - - IL2 IL3 IL4 IL5 IL6 IL7 IL8 IL9 IL10 IL11 IL12 IL13 IL14 IL15 IL16 IL17 IL18 IL19 IL20 IL21 IL22 IL23 Vector Address FFFE FFFC FFFC FFFA FFF8 FFF6 FFF4 FFF2 FFF0 FFEE FFEC FFEA FFE8 FFE6 FFE4 FFE2 FFE0 FFBE FFBC FFBA FFB8 FFB6 FFB4 FFB2 FFB0
Interrupt Factors Internal/External Internal Internal Internal Internal External External Internal External Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal External External Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal External (Reset) INTSWI (Software interrupt) INTUNDEF (Executed the undefined instruction interrupt) INTATRAP (Address trap interrupt) INTWDT (Watchdog timer interrupt)
INT0
Enable Condition Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable IMF* EF4 = 1, INT0EN = 1 IMF* EF5 = 1 IMF* EF6 = 1 IMF* EF7 = 1 IMF* EF8 = 1 IMF* EF9 = 1 IMF* EF10 = 1 IMF* EF11 = 1 IMF* EF12 = 1 IMF* EF13 = 1 IMF* EF14 = 1 IMF* EF15 = 1 IMF* EF16 = 1 IMF* EF17 = 1 IMF* EF18 = 1 IMF* EF19 = 1 IMF* EF20 = 1 IMF* EF21 = 1 IMF* EF22 = 1 IMF* EF23 = 1
Priority 1 2 2 2 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
INT1 INTTBT INT2 INTTC1 INTRXD0 INTTXD0 INTRXD1 INTTXD1 INT3 INT4 INTSIO INTTC3 INTTC4 INTTC5 INTTC6 Reserved (Note: Refer to Chapter of Real-Time Clock)
INT5
Reserved Reserved
Note 1: To use the address trap interrupt (INTATRAP), clear WDTCR1 to "0" (It is set for the "reset request" after reset is cancelled). For details, see "Address Trap". Note 2: To use the watchdog timer interrupt (INTWDT), clear WDTCR1 to "0" (It is set for the "Reset request" after reset is released). For details, see "Watchdog Timer".
3.1 Interrupt latches (IL21 to IL2)
An interrupt latch is provided for each interrupt source, except for a software interrupt and an executed the undefined instruction interrupt. When interrupt request is generated, the latch is set to "1", and the CPU is requested to accept the interrupt if its interrupt is enabled. The interrupt latch is cleared to "0" immediately after accepting interrupt. All interrupt latches are initialized to "0" during reset.
Page 41
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR) TMP86FM26UG
The interrupt latches are located on address 002EH, 003CH and 003DH in SFR area. Each latch can be cleared to "0" individually by instruction. However, IL2 and IL3 should not be cleared to "0" by software. For clearing the interrupt latch, load instruction should be used and then IL2 and IL3 should be set to "1". If the read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions are used, interrupt request would be cleared inadequately if interrupt is requested while such instructions are executed. Interrupt latches are not set to "1" by an instruction. Since interrupt latches can be read, the status for interrupt requests can be monitored by software.
Note: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Example 1 :Clears interrupt latches
DI LDW EI (ILL), 1110100000111111B ; IMF 0 ; IL12, IL10 to IL6 0 ; IMF 1
Example 2 :Reads interrupt latchess
LD WA, (ILL) ; W ILH, A ILL
Example 3 :Tests interrupt latches
TEST JR (ILL). 7 F, SSET ; if IL7 = 1 then jump
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR)
The interrupt enable register (EIR) enables and disables the acceptance of interrupts, except for the non-maskable interrupts (Software interrupt, undefined instruction interrupt, address trap interrupt and watchdog interrupt). Nonmaskable interrupt is accepted regardless of the contents of the EIR. The EIR consists of an interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and the individual interrupt enable flags (EF). These registers are located on address 002CH, 003AH and 003BH in SFR area, and they can be read and written by an instructions (Including read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions).
3.2.1
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF)
The interrupt enable register (IMF) enables and disables the acceptance of the whole maskable interrupt. While IMF = "0", all maskable interrupts are not accepted regardless of the status on each individual interrupt enable flag (EF). By setting IMF to "1", the interrupt becomes acceptable if the individuals are enabled. When an interrupt is accepted, IMF is cleared to "0" after the latest status on IMF is stacked. Thus the maskable interrupts which follow are disabled. By executing return interrupt instruction [RETI/RETN], the stacked data, which was the status before interrupt acceptance, is loaded on IMF again. The IMF is located on bit0 in EIRL (Address: 003AH in SFR), and can be read and written by an instruction. The IMF is normally set and cleared by [EI] and [DI] instruction respectively. During reset, the IMF is initialized to "0".
Page 42
TMP86FM26UG
3.2.2
Individual interrupt enable flags (EF21 to EF4)
Each of these flags enables and disables the acceptance of its maskable interrupt. Setting the corresponding bit of an individual interrupt enable flag to "1" enables acceptance of its interrupt, and setting the bit to "0" disables acceptance. During reset, all the individual interrupt enable flags (EF21 to EF4) are initialized to "0" and all maskable interrupts are not accepted until they are set to "1".
Note:In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Example 1 :Enables interrupts individually and sets IMF
DI LDW : : EI ; IMF 1 (EIRL), 1110100010100000B ; IMF 0 ; EF15 to EF13, EF11, EF7, EF5 1 Note: IMF should not be set.
Example 2 :C compiler description example
unsigned int _io (3AH) EIRL; _DI(); EIRL = 10100000B; : _EI(); /* 3AH shows EIRL address */
Page 43
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR) TMP86FM26UG
Interrupt Latches
(Initial value: 00000000 000000**) ILH,ILL (003DH, 003CH) 15 IL15 14 IL14 13 IL13 12 IL12 11 IL11 10 IL10 9 IL9 8 IL8 7 IL7 6 IL6 5 IL5 4 IL4 3 IL3 2 IL2 1 0
ILH (003DH)
ILL (003CH)
(Initial value: 00000000) ILE (002EH) 7 IL23 6 IL22 5 IL21 4 IL20 3 IL19 2 IL18 1 IL17 0 IL16
ILE (002EH)
IL21 to IL2
Interrupt latches
at RD 0: No interrupt request 1: Interrupt request
at WR 0: Clears the interrupt request 1: (Interrupt latch is not set.)
R/W
Note 1: To clear any one of bits IL7 to IL4, be sure to write "1" into IL2 and IL3. Note 2: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1". Note 3: Do not clear IL with read-modify-write instructions such as bit operations.
Interrupt Enable Registers
(Initial value: 00000000 0000***0) EIRH,EIRL (003BH, 003AH) 15 EF15 14 EF14 13 EF13 12 EF12 11 EF11 10 EF10 9 EF9 8 EF8 7 EF7 6 EF6 5 EF5 4 EF4 EIRL (003AH) 3 2 1 0 IMF
EIRH (003BH)
(Initial value: 00000000) EIRE (002CH) 7 EF23 6 EF22 5 EF21 4 EF20 3 EF19 2 EF18 1 EF17 0 EF16
EIRE (002CH)
EF21 to EF4 IMF
Individual-interrupt enable flag (Specified for each bit) Interrupt master enable flag
0: 1: 0: 1:
Disables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. Enables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. Disables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts Enables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts
R/W
Note 1: *: Don't care Note 2: Do not set IMF and the interrupt enable flag (EF15 to EF4) to "1" at the same time. Note 3: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Page 44
TMP86FM26UG
3.3 Interrupt Sequence
An interrupt request, which raised interrupt latch, is held, until interrupt is accepted or interrupt latch is cleared to "0" by resetting or an instruction. Interrupt acceptance sequence requires 8 machine cycles (2 s @16 MHz) after the completion of the current instruction. The interrupt service task terminates upon execution of an interrupt return instruction [RETI] (for maskable interrupts) or [RETN] (for non-maskable interrupts). Figure 3-1 shows the timing chart of interrupt acceptance processing.
3.3.1
Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows.
a. The interrupt master enable flag (IMF) is cleared to "0" in order to disable the acceptance of any following interrupt. b. The interrupt latch (IL) for the interrupt source accepted is cleared to "0". c. The contents of the program counter (PC) and the program status word, including the interrupt master enable flag (IMF), are saved (Pushed) on the stack in sequence of PSW + IMF, PCH, PCL. Meanwhile, the stack pointer (SP) is decremented by 3. d. The entry address (Interrupt vector) of the corresponding interrupt service program, loaded on the vector table, is transferred to the program counter. e. The instruction stored at the entry address of the interrupt service program is executed.
Note:When the contents of PSW are saved on the stack, the contents of IMF are also saved.
1-machine cycle
Interrupt service task
Interrupt request Interrupt latch (IL)
IMF Execute instruction a-1 Execute instruction Execute instruction
Interrupt acceptance
Execute RETI instruction
PC
a
a+1
a
b
b+1 b+2 b + 3
c+1
c+2
a
a+1 a+2
SP
n
n-1 n-2
n-3
n-2 n-1
n
Note 1: a: Return address entry address, b: Entry address, c: Address which RETI instruction is stored Note 2: On condition that interrupt is enabled, it takes 38/fc [s] or 38/fs [s] at maximum (If the interrupt latch is set at the first machine cycle on 10 cycle instruction) to start interrupt acceptance processing since its interrupt latch is set.
Figure 3-1 Timing Chart of Interrupt Acceptance/Return Interrupt Instruction
Example: Correspondence between vector table address for INTTBT and the entry address of the interrupt service program
Vector table address
Entry address Interrupt service program
FFF2H FFF3H
03H D2H
Vector
D203H D204H
0FH 06H
Figure 3-2 Vector table address,Entry address
Page 45
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.3 Interrupt Sequence TMP86FM26UG
A maskable interrupt is not accepted until the IMF is set to "1" even if the maskable interrupt higher than the level of current servicing interrupt is requested. In order to utilize nested interrupt service, the IMF is set to "1" in the interrupt service program. In this case, acceptable interrupt sources are selectively enabled by the individual interrupt enable flags. To avoid overloaded nesting, clear the individual interrupt enable flag whose interrupt is currently serviced, before setting IMF to "1". As for non-maskable interrupt, keep interrupt service shorten compared with length between interrupt requests; otherwise the status cannot be recovered as non-maskable interrupt would simply nested.
3.3.2
Saving/restoring general-purpose registers
During interrupt acceptance processing, the program counter (PC) and the program status word (PSW, includes IMF) are automatically saved on the stack, but the accumulator and others are not. These registers are saved by software if necessary. When multiple interrupt services are nested, it is also necessary to avoid using the same data memory area for saving registers. The following methods are used to save/restore the generalpurpose registers.
3.3.2.1
Using PUSH and POP instructions
If only a specific register is saved or interrupts of the same source are nested, general-purpose registers can be saved/restored using the PUSH/POP instructions.
Example :Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
PINTxx: PUSH WA ; Save WA register (interrupt processing) POP RETI WA ; Restore WA register ; RETURN
Address (Example) SP A SP PCL PCH PSW At acceptance of an interrupt W PCL PCH PSW At execution of PUSH instruction SP PCL PCH PSW At execution of POP instruction SP b-5 b-4 b-3 b-2 b-1 b At execution of RETI instruction
Figure 3-3 Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
3.3.2.2 Using data transfer instructions
To save only a specific register without nested interrupts, data transfer instructions are available.
Page 46
TMP86FM26UG
Example :Save/store register using data transfer instructions
PINTxx: LD (GSAVA), A ; Save A register (interrupt processing) LD RETI A, (GSAVA) ; Restore A register ; RETURN
Main task Interrupt acceptance Interrupt service task Saving registers
Restoring registers Interrupt return Saving/Restoring general-purpose registers using PUSH/POP data transfer instruction
Figure 3-4 Saving/Restoring General-purpose Registers under Interrupt Processing 3.3.3 Interrupt return
Interrupt return instructions [RETI]/[RETN] perform as follows.
[RETI]/[RETN] Interrupt Return 1. Program counter (PC) and program status word (PSW, includes IMF) are restored from the stack. 2. Stack pointer (SP) is incremented by 3.
As for address trap interrupt (INTATRAP), it is required to alter stacked data for program counter (PC) to restarting address, during interrupt service program.
Note:If [RETN] is executed with the above data unaltered, the program returns to the address trap area and INTATRAP occurs again.When interrupt acceptance processing has completed, stacked data for PCL and PCH are located on address (SP + 1) and (SP + 2) respectively.
Example 1 :Returning from address trap interrupt (INTATRAP) service program
PINTxx: POP LD PUSH WA WA, Return Address WA ; Recover SP by 2 ; ; Alter stacked data
(interrupt processing) RETN ; RETURN
Page 47
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.4 Software Interrupt (INTSW) TMP86FM26UG
Example 2 :Restarting without returning interrupt (In this case, PSW (Includes IMF) before interrupt acceptance is discarded.)
PINTxx: INC INC INC SP SP SP ; Recover SP by 3 ; ;
(interrupt processing) LD JP EIRL, data Restart Address ; Set IMF to "1" or clear it to "0" ; Jump into restarting address
Interrupt requests are sampled during the final cycle of the instruction being executed. Thus, the next interrupt can be accepted immediately after the interrupt return instruction is executed.
Note 1: It is recommended that stack pointer be return to rate before INTATRAP (Increment 3 times), if return interrupt instruction [RETN] is not utilized during interrupt service program under INTATRAP (such as Example 2). Note 2: When the interrupt processing time is longer than the interrupt request generation time, the interrupt service task is performed but not the main task.
3.4 Software Interrupt (INTSW)
Executing the SWI instruction generates a software interrupt and immediately starts interrupt processing (INTSW is highest prioritized interrupt). Use the SWI instruction only for detection of the address error or for debugging.
3.4.1
Address error detection
FFH is read if for some cause such as noise the CPU attempts to fetch an instruction from a non-existent memory address during single chip mode. Code FFH is the SWI instruction, so a software interrupt is generated and an address error is detected. The address error detection range can be further expanded by writing FFH to unused areas of the program memory. Address trap reset is generated in case that an instruction is fetched from RAM, DBR or SFR areas.
3.4.2
Debugging
Debugging efficiency can be increased by placing the SWI instruction at the software break point setting address.
3.5 Undefined Instruction Interrupt (INTUNDEF)
Taking code which is not defined as authorized instruction for instruction causes INTUNDEF. INTUNDEF is generated when the CPU fetches such a code and tries to execute it. INTUNDEF is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. Contemporary process is broken and INTUNDEF interrupt process starts, soon after it is requested.
Note: The undefined instruction interrupt (INTUNDEF) forces CPU to jump into vector address, as software interrupt (SWI) does.
3.6 Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)
Fetching instruction from unauthorized area for instructions (Address trapped area) causes reset output or address trap interrupt (INTATRAP). INTATRAP is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. Contemporary process is broken and INTATRAP interrupt process starts, soon after it is requested.
Note: The operating mode under address trapped, whether to be reset output or interrupt processing, is selected on watchdog timer control register (WDTCR).
Page 48
TMP86FM26UG
3.7 External Interrupts
The TMP86FM26UG has 6 external interrupt inputs. These inputs are equipped with digital noise reject circuits (Pulse inputs of less than a certain time are eliminated as noise). Edge selection is also possible with INT1 to INT4. The INT0/P60 pin can be configured as either an external interrupt input pin or an input/output port, and is configured as an input port during reset. Edge selection, noise reject control and INT0/P60 pin function selection are performed by the external interrupt control register (EINTCR).
Source Pin Enable Conditions Release Edge (level) Digital Noise Reject Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 7/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 15/fc or 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 49/fc or 193/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 7/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals.
INT0
INT0
IMF
EF4
INT0EN=1
Falling edge
INT1
INT1
IMF
EF5 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT2
INT2
IMF
EF7 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT3
INT3
IMF
EF13 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT4
INT4
IMF
EF14 = 1
Falling edge, Rising edge, Falling and Rising edge or H level
INT5
INT5
IMF
EF21 = 1
Falling edge
Note 1: In NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, if a signal with no noise is input on an external interrupt pin, it takes a maximum of "signal establishment time + 6/fs[s]" from the input signal's edge to set the interrupt latch. Note 2: When INT0EN = "0", IL4 is not set even if a falling edge is detected on the INT0 pin input. Note 3: When a pin with more than one function is used as an output and a change occurs in data or input/output status, an interrupt request signal is generated in a pseudo manner. In this case, it is necessary to perform appropriate processing such as disabling the interrupt enable flag.
Page 49
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.7 External Interrupts TMP86FM26UG
External Interrupt Control Register
EINTCR (0037H) 7 INT1NC 6 INT0EN 5 INT4ES 4 3 INT3ES 2 INT2ES 1 INT1ES 0 (Initial value: 0000 000*)
INT1NC INT0EN
Noise reject time select P60/INT0 pin configuration
0: Pulses of less than 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise 1: Pulses of less than 15/fc [s] are eliminated as noise 0: P60 input/output port 1: INT0 pin (Port P60 should be set to an input mode) 00: Rising edge 01: Falling edge 10: Rising edge and Falling edge 11: H level 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
R/W R/W
INT4 ES
INT4 edge select
R/W
INT3 ES INT2 ES INT1 ES
INT3 edge select INT2 edge select INT1 edge select
R/W R/W R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 2: When the system clock frequency is switched between high and low or when the external interrupt control register (EINTCR) is overwritten, the noise canceller may not operate normally. It is recommended that external interrupts are disabled using the interrupt enable register (EIR). Note 3: The maximum time from modifying INT1NC until a noise reject time is changed is 26/fc. Note 4: In case RESET pin is released while the state of INT4 pin keeps "H" level, the external interrupt 4 request is not generated even if the INT4 edge select is specified as "H" level. The rising edge is needed after RESET pin is released.
Page 50
TMP86FM26UG
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
The TMP86FM26UG adopts the memory mapped I/O system, and all peripheral control and data transfers are performed through the special function register (SFR) or the data buffer register (DBR). The SFR is mapped on address 0000H to 003FH, DBR is mapped on address 0F80H to 0FFFH. This chapter shows the arrangement of the special function register (SFR) and data buffer register (DBR) for TMP86FM26UG.
4.1 SFR
Address 0000H 0001H 0002H 0003H 0004H 0005H 0006H 0007H 0008H 0009H 000AH 000BH 000CH 000DH 000EH 000FH 0010H 0011H 0012H 0013H 0014H 0015H 0016H 0017H 0018H 0019H 001AH 001BH 001CH 001DH 001EH 001FH 0020H 0021H 0022H 0023H 0024H 0025H P6PRD UART0SR TC1SR Reserved TC3CR TC4CR TC5CR TC6CR TTREG3 TTREG4 TTREG5 TTREG6 PWREG3 PWREG4 PWREG5 PWREG6 UART0CR1 UART1SR TREG1AL TREG1AM TREG1AH TREG1B TC1CR1 TC1CR2 P2PRD P3PRD P5CR P6OUTCR P7CR UART1CR1 UART1CR2 Read Reserved P1DR P2DR P3DR P3OUTCR P5DR P6DR P7DR P1CR Write
Page 51
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.1 SFR TMP86FM26UG
Address 0026H 0027H 0028H 0029H 002AH 002BH 002CH 002DH 002EH 002FH 0030H 0031H 0032H 0033H 0034H 0035H 0036H 0037H 0038H 0039H 003AH 003BH 003CH 003DH 003EH 003FH
Read P2OUTCR LCDCR P1LCR P5LCR P7LCR EIRE Reserved ILE Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved TBTCR EINTCR SYSCR1 SYSCR2 EIRL EIRH ILL ILH Reserved PSW
Write UART0CR2
WDTCR1 WDTCR2
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program. Note 2: - ; Cannot be accessed. Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.).
Page 52
TMP86FM26UG
4.2 DBR
Address 0F80H 0F81H 0F82H 0F83H 0F84H 0F85H 0F86H 0F87H 0F88H 0F89H 0F8AH 0F8BH 0F8CH 0F8DH 0F8EH 0F8FH 0F90H 0F91H 0F92H 0F93H 0F94H 0F95H 0F96H 0F97H 0F98H 0F99H 0F9AH 0F9BH 0F9CH 0F9DH 0F9EH 0F9FH SIOSR RD0BUF RD1BUF Reserved MERGECR Reserved Read SEG1/0 SEG3/2 SEG5/4 SEG7/6 SEG9/8 SEG11/10 SEG13/12 SEG15/14 SEG17/16 SEG19/18 SEG21/20 SEG23/22 SEG25/24 SEG27/26 SEG29/28 SEG31/30 SIOBR0 SIOBR1 SIOBR2 SIOBR3 SIOBR4 SIOBR5 SIOBR6 SIOBR7 SIOCR1 SIOCR2 STOPCR TD0BUF TD1BUF Write
Page 53
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.2 DBR TMP86FM26UG
Address 0FA0H 0FA1H 0FA2H 0FA3H 0FA4H 0FA5H 0FA6H 0FA7H 0FA8H 0FA9H 0FAAH 0FABH 0FACH 0FADH 0FAEH 0FAFH 0FB0H 0FB1H 0FB2H 0FB3H 0FB4H 0FB5H 0FB6H 0FB7H 0FB8H 0FB9H 0FBAH 0FBBH 0FBCH 0FBDH 0FBEH 0FBFH
Read RTCCR1 RTCCR2 RTCSR RTREG1L RTREG1M RTREG1H DIVRG1L DIVRG1M DIVRG1H DIVRG2L DIVRG2M DIVRG2H SECR MINR HOURR WEEKR DAYR MONTHR YEARR LEAPR Reserved IRSCR CLKSCR CLKSMN CLKSMX Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Write
-
-
Address 0FC0H :: 0FDFH
Read Reserved :: Reserved
Write
Page 54
TMP86FM26UG
Address 0FE0H 0FE1H 0FE2H 0FE3H 0FE4H 0FE5H 0FE6H 0FE7H 0FE8H 0FE9H 0FEAH 0FEBH 0FECH 0FEDH 0FEEH 0FEFH 0FF0H 0FF1H 0FF2H 0FF3H 0FF4H 0FF5H 0FF6H 0FF7H 0FF8H 0FF9H 0FFAH 0FFBH 0FFCH 0FFDH 0FFEH 0FFFH
Read EEPCR EEPSR EEPEVA Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Write
-
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program. Note 2: - ; Cannot be accessed. Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.).
Page 55
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.2 DBR TMP86FM26UG
Page 56
TMP86FM26UG
5. I/O Ports
The TMP86FM26UG has 8 parallel input/output ports (41 pins) as follows.
Primary Function Port P1 Port P2 Port P3 Port P5 Port P6 Port P7 8-bit I/O port 5-bit I/O port 4-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port LCD segment output. Low-frequency resonator connections, external interrupt input, STOP mode release signal input, real time clock output and real time clock input. Timer/counter input/output, UART input and divider output. LCD segment output. External interrupt input, Key on Wake up input, Serial interface input/output, UART input/output and serial PROM mode control input. LCD segment output. Secondary Functions
Each output port contains a latch, which holds the output data. All input ports do not have latches, so the external input data should be externally held until the input data is read from outside or reading should be performed several timer before processing. Figure 5-1 shows input/output timing examples. External data is read from an I/O port in the S1 state of the read cycle during execution of the read instruction. This timing cannot be recognized from outside, so that transient input such as chattering must be processed by the program. Output data changes in the S2 state of the write cycle during execution of the instruction which writes to an I/O port.
Fetch cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Fetch cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Read cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Instruction execution cycle
Example: LD
A, (x)
Input strobe
Data input (a) Input timing Fetch cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Fetch cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Write cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Instruction execution cycle
Example: LD
(x), A
Output strobe Old (b) Output timing New
Data output
Note: The positions of the read and write cycles may vary, depending on the instruction.
Figure 5-1 Input/Output Timing (Example)
Page 57
5. I/O Ports
5.1 Port P1 (P17 to P10) TMP86FM26UG
5.1 Port P1 (P17 to P10)
Port P1 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in 1-bit unit. Port P1 is also used as a segment output of LCD. Input/output mode is specified by the P1 control register (P1CR). When used as an input port, the corresponding bit of P1CR and P1LCR should be cleared to "0". When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P1CR should be set to "1", and the respective P1LCR bit should be cleared to "0". When used as a segment pins of LCD, the respective bit of P1LCR should be set to "1". During reset, the output latch (P1DR), P1CR and P1LCR are initialized to "0". When the bit of P1CR and P1LCR is "0", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is a terminal input data. When the bit of P1CR is "0" and that of P1LCR is "1", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is always "0". When the bit of P1CR is "1", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is the value of P1DR. Table 5-1 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports
Programmed Value Function P1DR Port input Port "0" output Port "1" output LCD segment output * "0" "1" * P1CR "0" "1" "1" * P1LCR "0" "0" "0" "1"
Note: Asterisk (*) indicates "1" or "0" either of which can be selected.
Table 5-2 Values Read from P1DR and Register Programming
Conditions Values Read from P1DR P1CR "0" "0" "1" "1" P1LCR "0" "1" "0" Output latch contents Terminal input data "0"
Page 58
TMP86FM26UG
STOP OUTEN P1LCRi input P1LCRi P1CRi input P1CRi
D Q D Q
Data input (P1DRi) Data output (P1DRi)
D Q
P1i
Output latch LCD data output
Note: i = 7 to 0
Figure 5-2 Port 1
P1DR (0001H) R/W
7 P17 SEG24
6 P16 SEG25
5 P15 SEG26
4 P14 SEG27
3 P13 SEG28
2 P12 SEG29
1 P11 SEG30
0 P10 SEG31 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P1LCR (0029H)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P1LCR
Port P1/segment output control (Set for each bit individually)
0: P1 input/output port 1: LCD segment output
R/W
P1CR (0008H)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P1CR
P1 port input/output control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
Note: The port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. Therefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the output latch contents for the port in input mode might be changed by executing a bit manipulation instruction.
Page 59
5. I/O Ports
5.2 Port P2 (P24 to P20) TMP86FM26UG
5.2 Port P2 (P24 to P20)
Port P2 is a 5-bit input/output port. It is also used as an external interrupt, a STOP mode release signal input, and low-frequency crystal oscillator connection pins. When used as an input port or a secondary function pins, respective output latch (P2DR) should be set to "1". During reset, the P2DR is initialized to "1". A low-frequency crystal oscillator (32.768 kHz) is connected to pins P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) in the dualclock mode. In the single-clock mode, pins P21 and P22 can be used as normal input/output ports. It is recommended that pin P20 should be used as an external interrupt input, a STOP mode release signal input, or an input port. If it is used as an output port, the interrupt latch is set on the falling edge of the output pulse. It can be selected whether output circuit of port P2 is C-MOS output or a sink open drain individually, by setting P2OUTCR. When a corresponding bit of P2OUTCR is "0", the output circuit is selected to a sink open drain and when a corresponding bit of P2OUTCR is "1", the output circuit is selected to a C-MOS output. P2 port output latch (P2DR) and P2 port terminal input (P2PRD) are located on their respective address. When read the output latch data, the P2DR should be read and when read the terminal input data, the P2PRD register should be read. If a read instruction is executed for P2DR and P2PRD, read data of bits 7 to 5 are unstable and then read data of bits 7 to 5 and 2 to 1 are unstable in case of P2OUTCR.
STOP P2OUTCR0 P2OUTCR0 input Data input (P2PRD) Output latch read (P2DR) Data output (P2DR) Control output Control input a) P20
D Q D Q
P20(INT5, STOP)
Output latch
Data input (P21PRD) Output latch read (P21) Data output (P21) Data input (P22PRD) Output latch read (P22) Data output (P22)
D Q D Q
Osc. enable P21 (XTIN)
Output latch
P22 (XTOUT)
Output latch STOP OUTEN XTEN fs
b) P22, P21
Page 60
TMP86FM26UG
STOP OUTEN P2OUTCRi P2OUTCRi input Data input (P2PRD) Output latch read (P2DR) Data output (P2DR) Control output Control input c) P24, P23
Note: i = 4 and 3
D Q D Q
P2i
Output latch
Figure 5-3 Port 2
P2DR (0002H) R/W
7
6
5
4 P24 RTCOUT
3 P23 RTCIN
2 P22 XTOUT
1 P21 XTIN
0 P20
INT5 STOP
(Initial value: ***1 1111)
P2PRD (0009H) Read only
P24
P23
P22
P21
P20
P2OUTCR (0027H) R/W
P24
P23
P20 (Initial value: ***0 0**0)
P2OUTCR
Port P2 output circuit control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Sink open-drain output 1: C-MOS output
R/W
Note: Port P20 is used as STOP pin. Therefore, when stop mode is started, OUTEN does not affect to P20, and P20 becomes high-Z mode.
Page 61
5. I/O Ports
5.3 Port P3 (P33 to P30) TMP86FM26UG
5.3 Port P3 (P33 to P30)
Port P3 is a 8-bit input/output port. It is also used as a timer/counter input/output, UART input/output and divider output. When used as a timer/counter input/output, UART input/output and divider output, respective output latch (P3DR) should be set to "1". It can be selected whether output circuit of port P3 is C-MOS output or a sink open drain individually, by setting P3OUTCR. When a corresponding bit of P3OUTCR is "0", the output circuit is selected to a sink open drain and when a corresponding bit of P3OUTCR is "1", the output circuit is selected to a C-MOS output. When used as an input port, UART input and timer/counter input, respective output control (P3OUTCR) should be set to "0" after P3DR is set to "1". During reset, the P3DR is initialized to "1", and the P3OUTCR is initialized to "0". P3 port output latch (P3DR) and P3 port terminal input (P3PRD) are located on their respective address. When read the output latch data, the P3DR should be read and when read the terminal input data, the P3PRD register should be read. If a read instruction is executed for port P3, read data of bits 7 to 4 are unstable. Table 5-3 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports (P33 to P30)
Function Port input, UART input or timer counter input Port "0" output Port "1" output, UART output or timer counter output Programmed Value P3DR "1" "0" "1" P3OUTCR "0" Programming for each applications
STOP OUTEN P3OUTCRi P3OUTCRi input Data input (P3PRD) Output latch read (P3DR) Data output (P3DR) Control output Control input a) P33, P31, P30
D Q D Q
P3i
Output latch
Note: i = 3, 1, 0
Page 62
TMP86FM26UG
STOP OUTEN P3OUTCRi P3OUTCRi input Data input (P3PRD) Output latch read (P3DR) Data output (P3DR) Timer/Counter output UART output MERGECR[0] Control input b) P32
Note: i = 2
D Q D Q
P3i
Output latch
1 0S Y
Figure 5-4 Port 3
7 P3DR (0003H) R/W
6
5
4
3 P33 PWM6
PDO6 PPG6
2 P32
PWM4 PDO4 PPG4
1 P31
PWM3 PDO3
0 P30
DVO
TC3
(Initial value: **** 1111)
TC6 RXD1
TC4 TXD1
P3OUTCR (0004H)
(Initial value: **** 0000)
P3OUTCR
Port P3 output circuit control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Sink open-drain output 1: C-MOS output
R/W
P3PRD (000AH) Read only
P33
P32
P31
P30
Pin P32 can be used to output the logical AND or OR of UART output and timer/counter output when both of these functions are enabled. Whether to output the AND or OR of these outputs is selected by MERGECR. To use only UART ouput or timer/counter output, set MERGECR to "0"and then disable the output of whichever function not being used. UART/Timer Output Select Register
MERGECR (0F9EH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 UTSEL (Initial value: **** ***0)
UTSEL
UART/Timer counter output
0: Logical AND 1: Logical OR
R/W
Note: When MERGECR is read, bits 7 to 1 are read as undefined data.
Page 63
5. I/O Ports
5.3 Port P3 (P33 to P30) TMP86FM26UG
Timer counter output TXD output MERGECR= (AND) MERGECR= (OR)
Figure 5-5 Pin P32 Output Waveform
Page 64
TMP86FM26UG
5.4 Port P5 (P57 to P50)
Port P5 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in 1-bit unit. Port P5 is also used as a segment output of LCD. Input/output mode is specified by the P5 control register (P5CR). When used as an input port, the corresponding bit of P5CR and P5LCR should be cleared to "0". When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P5CR should be set to "1", and the respective P5LCR bit should be cleared to "0". When used as a segment pins of LCD, the respective bit of P5LCR should be set to "1". During reset, the output latch (P5DR), P5CR and P5LCR are initialized to "0". When the bit of P5CR and P5LCR is "0", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is a terminal input data. When the bit of P5CR is "0" and that of P5LCR is "1", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is always "0". When the bit of P5CR is "1", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is the value of P5DR. Table 5-4 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports
Programmed Value Function P5DR Port input Port "0" output Port "1" outpu LCD segment output * "0" "1" * P5CR "0" "1" "1" * P5LCR "0" "0" "0" "1"
Note: Asterisk (*) indicates "1" or "0" either of which can be selected.
Table 5-5 Values Read from P1DR and Register Programming
Conditions Values Read from P5DR P5CR "0" "0" "1" "1" P5LCR "0" "1" "0" Output latch contents Terminal input data "0"
Page 65
5. I/O Ports
5.4 Port P5 (P57 to P50) TMP86FM26UG
STOP OUTEN P5LCRi input P5LCRi P5CRi input P5CRi
D Q D Q
Data input (P5DRi) Data output (P5DRi)
D Q
P5i
Output latch LCD data output
Note: i = 7 to 0
Figure 5-6 Port 5
P5DR (0005H) R/W
7 P57 SEG16
6 P56 SEG17
5 P55 SEG18
4 P54 SEG19
3 P53 SEG20
2 P52 SEG21
1 P51 SEG22
0 P50 SEG23 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P5LCR (002AH)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P5LCR
Port P5/segment output control (Set for each bit individually)
0: P5 input/output port 1: LCD segment output
R/W
P5CR (000BH)
P5CR
P5 port input/output control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
Note: The port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. Therefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the output latch contents for the port in input mode might be changed by executing a bit manipulation instruction.
Page 66
TMP86FM26UG
5.5 Port P6 (P67 to P60)
Port P6 is a 8-bit input/output port. It is also used as a timer counter input, UART input/output, serial interface input/output, external interrupt input, Key on wake up input and seral PROM mode control input. When used as a secondary function pins respective output latch (P6DR) should be set to "1". It can be selected whether output circuit of port P6 is C-MOS output or a sink open drain individually, by setting P6OUTCR. When a corresponding bit of P6OUTCR is "0", the output circuit is selected to a sink open drain and when a corresponding bit of P6OUTCR is "1", the output circuit is selected to a C-MOS output. When used as an input port, UART input, serial interface input, external interrupt input, Key on Wake up input and timer/counter input, respective output control (P6OUTCR) should be set to "0" after P6DR is set to "1". During reset, the P6DR is initialized to "1", and the P6OUTCR is initialized to "0". P6 port output latch (P6DR) and P6 port terminal input (P6PRD) are located on their respective address. When read the output latch data, the P6DR should be read and when read the terminal input data, the P6PRD register should be read. Table 5-6 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports (P67 to P60)
Programmed Value Function P6DR Port input, UART input, serial interface input, external interrrupt input, Key on Wake up input or timer counter input Port "0" output Port "1" output, UART output or timer counter output P6OUTCR
"1"
"0"
"0" "1" Programming for each applications
STOP OUTEN P6OUTCRi P6OUTCRi input Data input (P6PRD) Output latch read (P6DR) Data output (P6DR) Control output Control input
Note: i = 7 to 0
D Q D Q
P6i
Output latch
Figure 5-7 Port 6
Page 67
5. I/O Ports
5.5 Port P6 (P67 to P60) TMP86FM26UG
7 P6DR (0006H) R/W P67 STOP5
6 P66 STOP4 SO TXD0
5 P65 STOP3 SI RXD0 BOOT
4 P64 STOP2
SCK
3 P63 INT3
2 P62 INT2 ECNT
1 P61 INT1 ECIN
0 P60
INT0
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
INT4
P6OUTCR (000CH)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P6OUTCR
Port P6 output circuit control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Sink open-drain output 1: C-MOS output
R/W
P6PRD (0024H) Read only
P67
P66
P65
P64
P63
P62
P61
P60
Page 68
TMP86FM26UG
5.6 Port P7(P77 to P70)
Port P7 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in 1-bit unit. Port P7 is also used as a segment output of LCD. Input/output mode is specified by the P7 control register (P7CR). When used as an input port, the corresponding bit of P7CR and P7LCR should be cleared to "0". When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P7CR should be set to "1", and the respective P7LCR bit should be cleared to "0". When used as a segment pins of LCD, the respective bit of P7LCR should be set to "1". During reset, the output latch (P7DR), P7CR and P7LCR are initialized to "0". When the bit of P7CR and P7LCR is "0", the corresponding P7bit data by read instruction is a terminal input data. When the bit of P7CR is "0" and that of P7LCR is "1", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is always "0". When the bit of P7CR is "1", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is the value of P7DR. Table 5-7 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports
Programmed Value Function P7DR Port input Port "0" output Port "1" output LCD segment output * "0" "1" * P7CR "0" "1" "1" * P7LCR "0" "0" "0" "1"
Note: Asterisk (*) indicates "1" or "0" either of which can be selected.
Table 5-8 Values Read from P7DR and Register Programming
Conditions Values Read from P7DR P7CR "0" "0" "1" "1" P7LCR "0" "1" "0" Output latch contents Terminal input data "0"
Page 69
5. I/O Ports
5.6 Port P7(P77 to P70) TMP86FM26UG
STOP OUTEN P7LCRi input P7LCRi P7CRi input P7CRi
D Q D Q
Data input (P7DRi) Data output (P7DRi)
D Q
P7i
Output latch LCD data output
Note: i = 7 to 0
Figure 5-8 Port 7
P7DR (0007H) R/W
7 P77 SEG8
6 P76 SEG9
5 P75 SEG10
4 P74 SEG11
3 P73 SEG12
2 P72 SEG13
1 P71 SEG14
0 P70 SEG15 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P7LCR (002BH)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P7LCR
Port P7/segment output control (Set for each bit individually)
0: P7 input/output port 1: LCD segment output
R/W
P7CR (000DH)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P7CR
P7 port input/output control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
Note: The port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. Therefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the output latch contents for the port in input mode might be changed by executing a bit manipulation instruction.
Page 70
TMP86FM26UG
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
The watchdog timer is a fail-safe system to detect rapidly the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops due to spurious noises or the deadlock conditions, and return the CPU to a system recovery routine. The watchdog timer signal for detecting malfunctions can be programmed only once as "reset request" or "interrupt request". Upon the reset release, this signal is initialized to "reset request". When the watchdog timer is not used to detect malfunctions, it can be used as the timer to provide a periodic interrupt.
Note: Care must be taken in system design since the watchdog timer functions are not be operated completely due to effect of disturbing noise.
6.1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Reset release
fc/2 or fs/2 fc/221 or fs/213 fc/219 or fs/211 fc/217 or fs/29
23 15
Selector
Binary counters Clock Clear 1 2 Overflow WDT output
R S Q Reset request INTWDT interrupt request
2
Interrupt request
Internal reset Q SR
WDTEN WDTT
Writing disable code
Writing clear code
WDTOUT
Controller
0034H WDTCR1
0035H WDTCR2
Watchdog timer control registers
Figure 6-1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Page 71
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control TMP86FM26UG
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control
The watchdog timer is controlled by the watchdog timer control registers (WDTCR1 and WDTCR2). The watchdog timer is automatically enabled after the reset release.
6.2.1
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer
The CPU malfunction is detected, as shown below. 1. Set the detection time, select the output, and clear the binary counter. 2. Clear the binary counter repeatedly within the specified detection time. If the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops or the deadlock conditions occur for some reason, the watchdog timer output is activated by the binary-counter overflow unless the binary counters are cleared. When WDTCR1 is set to "1" at this time, the reset request is generated and then internal hardware is initialized. When WDTCR1 is set to "0", a watchdog timer interrupt (INTWDT) is generated. The watchdog timer temporarily stops counting in the STOP mode including the warm-up or IDLE/SLEEP mode, and automatically restarts (continues counting) when the STOP/IDLE/SLEEP mode is inactivated.
Note:The watchdog timer consists of an internal divider and a two-stage binary counter. When the clear code 4EH is written, only the binary counter is cleared, but not the internal divider. The minimum binary-counter overflow time, that depends on the timing at which the clear code (4EH) is written to the WDTCR2 register, may be 3/ 4 of the time set in WDTCR1. Therefore, write the clear code using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set to WDTCR1.
Example :Setting the watchdog timer detection time to 221/fc [s], and resetting the CPU malfunction detection
LD LD LD (WDTCR2), 4EH (WDTCR1), 00001101B (WDTCR2), 4EH : Clears the binary counters. : WDTT 10, WDTOUT 1 : Clears the binary counters (always clears immediately before and after changing WDTT).
Within 3/4 of WDT detection time
: :
LD
(WDTCR2), 4EH
: Clears the binary counters.
Within 3/4 of WDT detection time
: : LD (WDTCR2), 4EH : Clears the binary counters.
Page 72
TMP86FM26UG
Watchdog Timer Control Register 1
WDTCR1 (0034H) 7 6 5 (ATAS) 4 (ATOUT) 3 WDTEN 2 WDTT 1 0 WDTOUT (Initial value: **11 1001)
WDTEN
Watchdog timer enable/disable
0: Disable (Writing the disable code to WDTCR2 is required.) 1: Enable NORMAL1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 217/fs 215/fs 213/fs 211/fs SLOW1/2 mode 217/fs 215fs 213fs 211/fs
Write only
WDTT
Watchdog timer detection time [s]
00 01 10 11
225/fc 223/fc 221fc 219/fc
Write only
WDTOUT
Watchdog timer output select
0: Interrupt request 1: Reset request
Write only
Note 1: After clearing WDTOUT to "0", the program cannot set it to "1". Note 2: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 3: WDTCR1 is a write-only register and must not be used with any of read-modify-write instructions. If WDTCR1 is read, a don't care is read. Note 4: To activate the STOP mode, disable the watchdog timer or clear the counter immediately before entering the STOP mode. After clearing the counter, clear the counter again immediately after the STOP mode is inactivated. Note 5: To clear WDTEN, set the register in accordance with the procedures shown in "6.2.3 Watchdog Timer Disable".
Watchdog Timer Control Register 2
WDTCR2 (0035H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: **** ****)
WDTCR2
Write Watchdog timer control code
4EH: Clear the watchdog timer binary counter (Clear code) B1H: Disable the watchdog timer (Disable code) D2H: Enable assigning address trap area Others: Invalid
Write only
Note 1: The disable code is valid only when WDTCR1 = 0. Note 2: *: Don't care Note 3: The binary counter of the watchdog timer must not be cleared by the interrupt task. Note 4: Write the clear code 4EH using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set in WDTCR1.
6.2.2
Watchdog Timer Enable
Setting WDTCR1 to "1" enables the watchdog timer. Since WDTCR1 is initialized to "1" during reset, the watchdog timer is enabled automatically after the reset release.
Page 73
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control TMP86FM26UG
6.2.3
Watchdog Timer Disable
To disable the watchdog timer, set the register in accordance with the following procedures. Setting the register in other procedures causes a malfunction of the microcontroller. 1. Set the interrupt master flag (IMF) to "0". 2. Set WDTCR2 to the clear code (4EH). 3. Set WDTCR1 to "0". 4. Set WDTCR2 to the disable code (B1H).
Note:While the watchdog timer is disabled, the binary counters of the watchdog timer are cleared.
Example :Disabling the watchdog timer
DI LD LDW (WDTCR2), 04EH (WDTCR1), 0B101H : IMF 0 : Clears the binary counter : WDTEN 0, WDTCR2 Disable code
Table 6-1 Watchdog Timer Detection Time (Example: fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz) Watchdog Timer Detection Time[s]
WDTT DV7CK = 0 00 01 10 11 2.097 524.288 m 131.072 m 32.768 m NORMAL1/2 mode DV7CK = 1 4 1 250 m 62.5 m SLOW mode 4 1 250 m 62.5 m
6.2.4
Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)
When WDTCR1 is cleared to "0", a watchdog timer interrupt request (INTWDT) is generated by the binary-counter overflow. A watchdog timer interrupt is the non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt master flag (IMF). When a watchdog timer interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including a watchdog timer interrupt is already accepted, the new watchdog timer interrupt is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending. Therefore, if watchdog timer interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the RETN instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller. To generate a watchdog timer interrupt, set the stack pointer before setting WDTCR1.
Example :Setting watchdog timer interrupt
LD LD SP, 043FH (WDTCR1), 00001000B : Sets the stack pointer : WDTOUT 0
Page 74
TMP86FM26UG
6.2.5
Watchdog Timer Reset
When a binary-counter overflow occurs while WDTCR1 is set to "1", a watchdog timer reset request is generated. When a watchdog timer reset request is generated, the internal hardware is reset. The reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 s @ fc = 16.0 MHz). After reset, the CPU enters a wait state until the power supply of the flash memory control circuit is stable. The wait time is 210/fc [s] (62.5 s @ fc = 16.0 MHz). The CPU halts and remains in a wait state, and restarts operation after the wait time.
Note:When a watchdog timer reset is generated in the SLOW1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-frequency clock) since the high-frequency clock oscillator is restarted. However, when crystals have inaccuracies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate value because it has slight errors.
219/fc [s] 217/fc Clock Binary counter Overflow INTWDT interrupt request
(WDTCR1= "0")
(WDTT=11) 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0
Internal reset
(WDTCR1= "1")
A reset occurs Write 4EH to WDTCR2
Figure 6-2 Watchdog Timer Interrupt
Page 75
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.3 Address Trap TMP86FM26UG
6.3 Address Trap
The Watchdog Timer Control Register 1 and 2 share the addresses with the control registers to generate address traps. Watchdog Timer Control Register 1
WDTCR1 (0034H) 7 6 5 ATAS 4 ATOUT 3 (WDTEN) 2 (WDTT) 1 0 (WDTOUT) (Initial value: **11 1001)
ATAS
Select address trap generation in the internal RAM area Select operation at address trap
0: Generate no address trap 1: Generate address traps (After setting ATAS to "1", writing the control code D2H to WDTCR2 is required) 0: Interrupt request 1: Reset request
Write only
ATOUT
Watchdog Timer Control Register 2
WDTCR2 (0035H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: **** ****)
WDTCR2
Write Watchdog timer control code and address trap area control code
D2H: Enable address trap area selection (ATRAP control code) 4EH: Clear the watchdog timer binary counter (WDT clear code) B1H: Disable the watchdog timer (WDT disable code) Others: Invalid
Write only
6.3.1
Selection of Address Trap in Internal RAM (ATAS)
WDTCR1 specifies whether or not to generate address traps in the internal RAM area. To execute an instruction in the internal RAM area, clear WDTCR1 to "0". To enable the WDTCR1 setting, set WDTCR1 and then write D2H to WDTCR2. Executing an instruction in the SFR or DBR area generates an address trap unconditionally regardless of the setting in WDTCR1.
6.3.2
Selection of Operation at Address Trap (ATOUT)
When an address trap is generated, either the interrupt request or the reset request can be selected by WDTCR1.
6.3.3
Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)
While WDTCR1 is "0", if the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (while WDTCR1 is "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap interrupt (INTATRAP) will be generated. An address trap interrupt is a non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt master flag (IMF). When an address trap interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including an address trap interrupt is already accepted, the new address trap is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending. Therefore, if address trap interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the RETN instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller. To generate address trap interrupts, set the stack pointer beforehand.
Page 76
TMP86FM26UG
6.3.4
Address Trap Reset
While WDTCR1 is "1", if the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (while WDTCR1 is "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap reset will be generated. When an address trap reset request is generated, the internal hardware is reset. The reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 s @ fc = 16.0 MHz). After reset, the CPU enters a wait state until the power supply of the flash memory control circuit is stable. The wait time is 210/fc [s] (62.5 s @ fc = 16.0 MHz). The CPU halts and remains in a wait state, and restarts operation after the wait time.
Note:When an address trap reset is generated in the SLOW1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-frequency clock) since the high-frequency clock oscillator is restarted. However, when crystals have inaccuracies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate value because it has slight errors.
Page 77
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.3 Address Trap TMP86FM26UG
Page 78
TMP86FM26UG
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
The time base timer generates time base for key scanning, dynamic displaying, etc. It also provides a time base timer interrupt (INTTBT).
7.1 Time Base Timer
7.1.1 Configuration
MPX
fc/223 or fs/215 fc/221 or fs/213 fc/216 or fs/28 fc/214 or fs/26 fc/213 or fs/25 fc/212 or fs/24 fc/211 or fs/23 fc/29 or fs/2
Source clock
Falling edge detector
IDLE0, SLEEP0 release request
INTTBT interrupt request
3 TBTCK TBTCR Time base timer control register TBTEN
Figure 7-1 Time Base Timer configuration 7.1.2 Control
Time Base Timer is controlled by Time Base Timer control register (TBTCR). Time Base Timer Control Register
7 TBTCR (0036H) (DVOEN) 6 (DVOCK) 5 4 (DV7CK) 3 TBTEN 2 1 TBTCK 0 (Initial Value: 0000 0000)
TBTEN
Time Base Timer enable / disable
0: Disable 1: Enable NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 fc/223 fc/221 fc/216 fc/2
14
DV7CK = 1 fs/215 fs/213 fs/28 fs/2
6
SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 Mode fs/215 fs/213 - - - - - - R/W
TBTCK
Time Base Timer interrupt Frequency select : [Hz]
010 011 100 101 110 111
fc/213 fc/2
12
fs/25 fs/2
4
fc/211 fc/2
9
fs/23 fs/2
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz], fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don't care
Page 79
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.1 Time Base Timer TMP86FM26UG
Note 2: The interrupt frequency (TBTCK) must be selected with the time base timer disabled (TBTEN="0"). (The interrupt frequency must not be changed with the disable from the enable state.) Both frequency selection and enabling can be performed simultaneously.
Example :Set the time base timer frequency to fc/216 [Hz] and enable an INTTBT interrupt.
LD LD DI SET (EIRL) . 6 (TBTCR) , 00000010B (TBTCR) , 00001010B ; TBTCK 010 ; TBTEN 1 ; IMF 0
Table 7-1 Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency ( Example : fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz )
Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency [Hz] TBTCK NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 1.91 7.63 244.14 976.56 1953.13 3906.25 7812.5 31250 NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 1 1 4 128 512 1024 2048 4096 16384 1 4 - - - - - - SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode
7.1.3
Function
An INTTBT ( Time Base Timer Interrupt ) is generated on the first falling edge of source clock ( The divider output of the timing generator which is selected by TBTCK. ) after time base timer has been enabled. The divider is not cleared by the program; therefore, only the first interrupt may be generated ahead of the set interrupt period ( Figure 7-2 ).
Source clock
TBTCR
INTTBT Interrupt period Enable TBT
Figure 7-2 Time Base Timer Interrupt
Page 80
TMP86FM26UG
7.2 Divider Output (DVO)
Approximately 50% duty pulse can be output using the divider output circuit, which is useful for piezoelectric buzzer drive. Divider output is from DVO pin.
7.2.1
Configuration
Output latch Data output D Q DVO pin
fc/213 or fs/25 fc/212 or fs/24 fc/211 or fs/23 fc/210 or fs/22
MPX A B CY D S 2 DVOCK TBTCR Divider output control register (a) configuration DVOEN
Port output latch TBTCR
DVO pin output (b) Timing chart
Figure 7-3 Divider Output 7.2.2 Control
The Divider Output is controlled by the Time Base Timer Control Register. Time Base Timer Control Register
7 TBTCR (0036H) DVOEN 6 DVOCK 5 4 (DV7CK) 3 (TBTEN) 2 1 (TBTCK) 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
DVOEN
Divider output enable / disable
0: Disable 1: Enable NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/25 fs/24 fs/23 fs/22 SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 Mode fs/25 fs/24 fs/23 fs/22
R/W
DVOCK
Divider Output (DVO) frequency selection: [Hz]
00 01 10 11
fc/213 fc/212 fc/211 fc/210
R/W
Note: Selection of divider output frequency (DVOCK) must be made while divider output is disabled (DVOEN="0"). Also, in other words, when changing the state of the divider output frequency from enabled (DVOEN="1") to disable(DVOEN="0"), do not change the setting of the divider output frequency.
Page 81
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.2 Divider Output (DVO) TMP86FM26UG
Example :1.95 kHz pulse output (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD LD
(TBTCR) , 00000000B (TBTCR) , 10000000B
; DVOCK "00" ; DVOEN "1"
Table 7-2 Divider Output Frequency ( Example : fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz )
Divider Output Frequency [Hz] DVOCK NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 00 01 10 11 1.953 k 3.906 k 7.813 k 15.625 k DV7CK = 1 1.024 k 2.048 k 4.096 k 8.192 k SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode 1.024 k 2.048 k 4.096 k 8.192 k
Page 82
8.1 Configuration
fc/212 or fs/24
TREG1B Y S 2 SGEDG 1 Window pulse generator TC1M 2
INTTC1
fc/213 or fs/25
fc/214 or fs/26
A B C
PWM6/PDO6/PPG6
WGPSCK
TC6OUT
1 Edge detector C B A Y S
Pulse width measurement mode
P33 Pin
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
ECNT Pin
TC1S
TC1CK
TC1M
TC1C
TMP86FM26UG
TC1CR1
SEG SGP SGEDG WGPSCK TC6OUT
Figure 8-1 Timer/Counter1
10 11 00 S CMP Y CLEAR signal 18- bit up-counter H
Timer/Event count modes Frequency measurement mode
Page 83
Y C D E F G B A 3 22 1 12121 TC1CR2
SEG 1
ECIN Pin
Edge detector
F/F
1
1 TC1SR TREG1AL TREG1AM TREG1AH
fs/215 or fc/223 fs/25 or fc/213 fs/23 or fc/211 fc/27 fc/23 fs fc
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.2 Control TMP86FM26UG
8.2 Control
The Timer/counter 1 is controlled by timer/counter 1 control registers (TC1CR1/TC1CR2), an 18-bit timer register (TREG1A), and an 8-bit internal window gate pulse setting register (TREG1B). Timer register
7 TREG1AH (0012H) R/W - 6 - 5 - 4 - 3 - 2 - 1 0 (Initial value: 00)
TREG1AH
7 TREG1AM (0011H) R/W
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TREG1AM
7 TREG1AL (0010H) R/W
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TREG1AL
7 TREG1B (0013H)
6 Ta
5
4
3
2 Tb
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
NORMAL1/2,IDLE1/2 modes WGPSCK DV7CK=0 Setting "H" level period of the window gate pulse 00 01 10 00 01 10 (16 - Ta) x 212/fc (16 - Ta) x 2 /fc (16 - Ta) x 214/fc
13
DV7CK=1 (16 - Ta) x 24/fs (16 - Ta) x 2 /fs (16 - Ta) x 26/fs
5
SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes (16 - Ta) x 24/fs (16 - Ta) x 25/fs (16 - Ta) x 26/fs (16 - Tb) x 24/fs (16 - Tb) x 25/fs (16 - Tb) x 26/fs R/W
Ta
Tb
Setting "L" level period of the window gate pulse
(16 - Tb) x 212/fc (16 - Tb) x 213/fc (16 - Tb) x 214/fc
(16 - Tb) x 24/fs (16 - Tb) x 25/fs (16 - Tb) x 26/fs
Page 84
TMP86FM26UG
Timer/counter 1 control register 1
7 TC1CR1 (0014H) TC1C 6 TC1S 5 4 3 TC1CK 2 1 TC1M 0 (Initial value: 1000 1000)
TC1C
Counter/overfow flag controll
0: 1: 00: 10: *1:
Clear Counter/overflow flag ( "1" is automatically set after clearing.) Not clear Counter/overflow flag Stop and counter clear and overflow flag clear Start Reserved NORMAL1/2,IDLE1/2 modes DV7CK="0" DV7CK="1" fc fs fs/215 fs/25 fs/23 fc/27 fc/23 SLOW1/2 mode fc fs/215 fs/25 fs/23 SLEEP1/2 mode fc fs/215 fs/25 fs/23 -
R/W
TC1S
TC1 start control
R/W
TC1CK
TC1 source clock select
000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: 00: 01: 10: 11:
fc fs fc/223 fc/2
13
R/W
fc/211 fc/2
7
fc/23
External clock (ECIN pin input) Timer/Event counter mode Reserved Pulse width measurement mode Frequency measurement mode
TC1M
TC1 mode select
R/W
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz] fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz] * ; Don't care Note 2: Writing to the low-byte of the timer register 1A (TREG1AL, TREG1AM), the compare function is inhibited until the highbyte (TREG1AH) is written. Note 3: Set the mode and source clock, and edge (selection) when the TC1 stops (TC1S=00). Note 4: "fc" can be selected as the source clock only in the timer mode during SLOW mode and in the pulse width measurement mode during NORMAL 1/2 or IDLE 1/2 mode. Note 5: When a read instruction is executed to the timer register (TREG1A), the counter immediate value, not the register set value, is read out. Therefore it is impossible to read out the written value of TREG1A. To read the counter value, the read instruction should be executed when the counter stops to avoid reading unstable value. Note 6: Set the timer register (TREG1A) to 1. Note 7: When using the timer mode and pulse width measurement mode, set TC1CK (TC1 source clock select) to internal clock. Note 8: When using the event counter mode, set TC1CK (TC1 source clock select) to external clock. Note 9: Because the read value is different from the written value, do not use read-modify-write instructions to TREG1A. Note 10:fc/27, fc/23can not be used as source clock in SLOW/SLEEP mode. Note 11:The read data of bits 7 to 2 in TREG1AH are always "0". (Data "1" can not be written.)
Page 85
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.2 Control TMP86FM26UG
Timer/Counter 1 control register 2
7 TC1CR2 (0015H) SEG 6 SGP 5 4 SGEDG 3 WGPSCK 2 1 TC6OUT 0 "0" (Initial value: 0000 000*)
SEG
External input clock (ECIN) edge select
0: 1: 00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1:
Counts at the falling edge Counts at the both (falling/rising) edges ECNT input Internal window gate pulse (TREG1B) PWM6/PDO6/PPG6 (TC6)output Reserved Interrupts at the falling edge Interrupts at the falling/rising edges NORMAL1/2,IDLE1/2 modes DV7CK="0" DV7CK="1" 24/fs 2 /fs 26/fs Reserved
5
R/W
SGP
Window gate pulse select
R/W
SGEDG
Window gate pulse interrupt edge select
SLOW1/2 mode 24/fs 2 /fs 26/fs Reserved
5
SLEEP1/2 mode 24/fs 25/fs 26/fs Reserved R/W R/W
WGPSCK
Window gate pulse source clock select
00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1:
212/fc 2 /fc 214/fc Reserved Output to P33 No output to P33
13
TC6OUT
TC6 output (PWM6/PDO6/PPG6) external output select
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz] fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz] *; Don't care Note 2: Set the mode, source clock, and edge (selection) when the TC1 stops (TC1S = 00). Note 3: If there is no need to use PWM6/PDO6/PPG6 as window gate pulse of TC1 always write "0" to TC6OUT. Note 4: Make sure to write TC1CR2 "0" to bit 0 in TC1CR2. Note 5: When using the event counter mode or pulse width measurement mode, set SEG to "0".
Page 86
TMP86FM26UG
TC1 status register
7 TC1SR (0016H) HECF 6 HEOVF 5 "0" 4 "0" 3 "0" 2 "0" 1 "0" 0 "0" (Initial value: 0000 0000)
HECF
Operating Status monitor
0: 1: 0: 1:
Stop (during Tb) or disable Under counting (during Ta) No overflow Overflow status
Read only
HEOVF
Counter overflow monitor
8.3 Function
TC1 has four operating modes. The timer mode of the TC1 is used at warm-up when switching form SLOW mode to NORMAL2 mode.
8.3.1
Timer mode
In this mode, counting up is performed using the internal clock. The contents of TREGIA are compared with the contents of up-counter. If a match is found, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated, and the counter is cleared. Counting up resumes after the counter is cleared.
Table 8-1 Source clock (internal clock) of Timer/Counter 1
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode SLOW Mode DV7CK = 0 fc/223 [Hz] fc/213 fc/211 fc/27 fc/23 fc fs DV7CK = 1 fs/215 [Hz] fs/25 fs/23 fc/27 fc/23 fc fs fs/215 [Hz] fs/25 fs/23 fc (Note) fs/215 [Hz] fs/25 fs/23 0.52 s 512 ms 128 ms 8 ms 0.5 ms 62.5 ns SLEEP Mode fc = 16 MHz Resolution fs =32.768 kHz 1s 0.98 ms 244 ms 30.5 ms Maximum Time Setting fc = 16 MHz 38.2 h 2.2 min 0.6 min 2.1 s 131.1 ms 16.4 ms fs =32.768 kHz 72.8 h 4.3 min 1.07 min 8s
Note: When fc is selected for the source clock in SLOW mode, the lower bits 11 of TREG1A is invalid, and a match of the upper bits 7 makes interrupts.
Page 87
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP86FM26UG
Command Start
Internal clock
Up counter
0
1
2
3
4
n-1
n0
1
2
3
4
5
6
TREG1A
n
Match detect Counter clear
INTTC1 interrupt
Figure 8-2 Timing chart for timer mode 8.3.2 Event Counter mode
It is a mode to count up at the falling edge of the ECIN pin input. When using this mode, set TC1CR1 to the external clock and then set TC1CR2 to "0" (Both edges can not be used). The countents of TREG1A are compared with the contents of up-counter. If a match is found, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated, and the counter is cleared. Counting up resumes for ECIN pin input edge each after the counter is cleared. The maximum applied frequency is fc/24 [Hz] in NORMAL 1/2 or IDLE 1/2 mode and fs/24[Hz] in SLOW or SLEEP mode . Two or more machine cycles are required for both the "H" and "L" levels of the pulse width.
Start
ECIN pin input
Up counter
0
1
2
n-1
n
0
1
2
TREG1A
n
Match Detect Counter clear
INTTC1 interrupt
Figure 8-3 Event counter mode timing chart
Page 88
TMP86FM26UG
8.3.3
Pulse Width Measurement mode
In this mode, pulse widths are counted on the falling edge of logical AND-ed pulse between ECIN pin input (window pulse) and the internal clock. When using this mode, set TC1CR1 to suitable internal clock and then set TC1CR2 to "0" (Both edges can not be used). An INTTC1 interrupt is generated when the ECIN input detects the falling edge of the window pulse or both rising and falling edges of the window pulse, that can be selected by TC1CR2. The contents of TREG1A should be read while the count is stopped (ECIN pin is low), then clear the counter using TC1CR1 (Normally, execute these process in the interrupt program). When the counter is not cleared by TC1CR1, counting-up resumes from previous stopping value. When up counter is counted up from 3FFFFH to 00000H, an overflow occurs. At that time, TC1SR is set to "1". TC1SR remains the previous data until the counter is required to be cleared by TC1CR1.
Note:In pulse width measurement mode, if TC1CR1 is written to "00" while ECIN input is "1", INTTC1 interrupt occurs. According to the following step, when timer counter is stopped, INTTC1 interrupt latch should be cleared to "0".
Example :
TC1STOP : | DI CLR LD LD SET EI | | (EIRH). 0 (TC1CR1), 00011010B (ILH), 11111110B (EIRH). 0 | ; Clear IMF ; Clear bit0 of EIRH ; Stop timer couter 1 ; Clear bit0 of ILH ; Set bit0 of EIRH ; Set IMF
Note 1: When SGEDG (window gate pulse interrupt edge select) is set to both edges and ECIN pin input is "1" in the pulse width measurement mode, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated by setting TC1S (TC1 start control) to "10" (start). Note 2: In the pulse width measurement mode, HECF (operating status monitor) cannot used. Note 3: Because the up counter is counted on the falling edge of logical AND-ed pulse (between ECIN pin input and the internal clock), if ECIN input becomes falling edge while internal source clock is "H" level, the up counter stops plus "1".
Count Start
Count Stop
Count Start
ECIN pin input
Internal clock
AND-ed pulse (Internal signal) Up counter 0 1 2 3 n-2 n-1 n n+1
Read Clear Interrupt
0
1
2
INTTC1 interrupt
TC1CR1
Figure 8-4 Pulse width measurement mode timing chart
Page 89
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP86FM26UG
8.3.4
Frequency Measurement mode
In this mode, the frequency of ECIN pin input pulse is measured. When using this mode, set TC1CR1 to the external clock. The edge of the ECIN input pulse is counted during "H" level of the window gate pulse selected by TC1CR2. To use ECNT input as a window gate pulse, TC1CR2 should be set to "00". An INTTC1 interrupt is generated on the falling edge or both the rising/falling edges of the window gate pulse, that can be selected by TC1CR2. In the interrupt service program, read the contents of TREG1A while the count is stopped (window gate pulse is low), then clear the counter using TC1CR1. When the counter is not cleared, counting up resumes from previous stopping value. The window pulse status can be monitored by TC1SR. When up counter is counted up from 3FFFFH to 00000H, an overflow occurs. At that time, TC1SR is set to "1". TC1SR remains the previous data until the counter is required to be cleared by TC1CR1. Using TC6 output (PWM6/PDO6/PPG6) for the window gate pulse, external output of PWM6/PDO6/PPG6 to P33 can be controlled using TC1CR2. Zero-clearing TC1CR2 outputs PWM6/PDO6/ PPG6 to P33; setting 1 in TC1CR2 does not output PWM6/PDO6/PPG6 to P33. (TC1CR2 is used to control output to P33 only. Thus, use the timer counter 6 control register to operate/stop PWM6/PDO6/PPG6.)
When the internal window gate pulse is selected, the window gate pulse is set as follows. Table 8-2 Internal window gate pulse setting time
NORMAL1/2,IDLE1/2 modes WGPSCK DV7CK=0 Setting "H" level period of the window gate pulse 00 01 10 00 01 10 (16 - Ta) x 212/fc (16 - Ta) x 213/fc
14
DV7CK=1 (16 - Ta) x 24/fs (16 - Ta) x 25/fs
6
SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes (16 - Ta) x 24/fs (16 - Ta) x 25/fs (16 - Ta) x 26/fs (16 - Tb) x 24/fs (16 - Tb) x 25/fs (16 - Tb) x 26/fs R/W
Ta
(16 - Ta) x 2 /fc (16 - Tb) x 212/fc (16 - Tb) x 2 /fc (16 - Tb) x 214/fc
13
(16 - Ta) x 2 /fs (16 - Tb) x 24/fs (16 - Tb) x 2 /fs (16 - Tb) x 26/fs
5
Tb
Setting "L" level period of the window gate pulse
The internal window gate pulse consists of "H" level period (Ta) that is counting time and "L" level period (Tb) that is counting stop time. Ta or Tb can be individually set by TREG1B. One cycle contains Ta + Tb.
Note 1: Because the internal window gate pulse is generated in synchronization with the internal divider, it may be delayed for a maximum of one cycle of the source clock (WGPSCK) immediately after start of the timer. Note 2: Set the internal window gate pulse when the timer counter is not operating or during the Tb period. When Tb is overwritten during the Tb period, the update is valid from the next Tb period. Note 3: In case of TC1CR2 = "1", if window gate pulse becomes falling edge, the up counter stops plus "1" regardless of ECIN input level. Therefore, if ECIN is always "H" or "L" level, count value becomes "1". Note 4: In case of TC1CR2 = "0", because the up counter is counted on the falling edge of logical AND-ed pulse (between ECIN pin input and window gate pulse), if window gate pulse becomes falling edge while ECIN input is "H" level, the up counter stops plus "1". Therefore, if ECIN input is always "H" level, count value becomes "1".
Page 90
TMP86FM26UG
Table 8-3 Table Setting Ta and Tb (WGPSCK = 10, fc = 16 MHz)
Setting Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Setting time 16.38ms 15.36ms 14.34ms 13.31ms 12.29ms 11.26ms 10.24ms 9.22ms Setting Value 8 9 A B C D E F Setting time 8.19ms 7.17ms 6.14ms 5.12ms 4.10ms 3.07ms 2.05ms 1.02ms
Table 8-4 Table Setting Ta and Tb (WGPSCK = 10, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Setting Valuen 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Setting time 31.25ms 29.30ms 27.34ms 25.39ms 23.44ms 21.48ms 19.53ms 17.58ms Setting Value 8 9 A B C D E F Setting time 15.63ms 13.67ms 11.72ms 9.77ms 7.81ms 5.86ms 3.91ms 1.95ms
Page 91
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP86FM26UG
ECIN pin input Window gate pulse AND-ed pulse (Internal signal) Up counter 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Ta
Tb
Ta
INTTC1 interrupt
Read Clear
TC1CR1 a) TC1CR2 = "0"
TC1CR2
ECIN pin input Window gate pulse Up counter 0
Ta
Tb
Ta
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12
INTTC1 interrupt
Read Clear
TC1CR1 a) TC1CR2 = "1"
Figure 8-5 Timing chart for the frequency measurement mode (Window gate pulse falling interrupt)
Page 92
TMP86FM26UG
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration
PWM mode
Overflow
fc/211 or fs/23 INTTC4 interrupt request
fc/2 5 fc/2 fc/23
fs
7
fc/2 fc
TC4 pin TC4M TC4S TFF4
A B C D E F G H S
Y
A B S
Y
Clear
8-bit up-counter
TC4S
PDO, PPG mode
A 16-bit mode
16-bit mode
Y B S S A Y B
Timer, Event Counter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F4
PDO4/PWM4/ PPG4 pin
TC4CK TC4CR TTREG4 PWREG4
PWM, PPG mode
DecodeEN
TFF4
PDO, PWM, PPG mode
16-bit mode
TC3S
PWM mode
fc/211 or fs/23
fc/27 5 fc/2 3 fc/2
fs
TC3 pin TC3M TC3S TFF3
fc/2 fc
A B C D E F G H S
Clear Y
8-bit up-counter Overflow 16-bit mode PDO mode
INTTC3 interrupt request
16-bit mode Timer, Event Couter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F3
PDO3/PWM3/ pin
TC3CK TC3CR TTREG3 PWREG3
PWM mode
DecodeEN
TFF3
PDO, PWM mode 16-bit mode
Figure 9-1 8-Bit TimerCounter 3, 4
Page 93
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86FM26UG
9.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 3 is controlled by the TimerCounter 3 control register (TC3CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG3, PWREG3). TimerCounter 3 Timer Register
TTREG3 (001CH) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG3 (0020H) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG3) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG3) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 3 Control Register
TC3CR (0018H) 7 TFF3 6 5 TC3CK 4 3 TC3S 2 1 TC3M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF3
Time F/F3 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - fc (Note 8)
R/W
000 001 TC3CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC3S TC3 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: TC3M TC3M operating mode select 010: 011: 1**:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
R/W
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit mode (Each mode is selectable with TC4M.) Reserved
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock[Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC3S= 1 0), do not change the TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 settings. To start the timer operation (TC3S= 0 1), TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 can be programmed. Note 4: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, set the operating mode by programming TC4CR, where TC3M must be fixed to 011. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC3CK. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC4CR and TC4CR, respectively. Note 6: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 9-1 and Table 9-2.
Page 94
TMP86FM26UG
Note 7: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 93. Note 8: The operating clock fc in the SLOW or SLEEP mode can be used only as the high-frequency warm-up mode.
Page 95
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86FM26UG
The TimerCounter 4 is controlled by the TimerCounter 4 control register (TC4CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG4 and PWREG4). TimerCounter 4 Timer Register
TTREG4 (001DH) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG4 (0021H) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG4) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG4) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 4 Control Register
TC4CR (0019H) 7 TFF4 6 5 TC4CK 4 3 TC4S 2 1 TC4M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF4
Timer F/F4 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc TC4 pin input
3
R/W SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - - R/W
000 001 TC4CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC4S TC4 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: TC4M TC4M operating mode select 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc
3
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode Reserved 16-bit timer/event counter mode Warm-up counter mode 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit PPG mode
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC4S= 1 0), do not change the TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 settings. To start the timer operation (TC4S= 0 1), TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 can be programmed. Note 4: When TC4M= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the source clock becomes the TC3 overflow signal regardless of the TC4CK setting. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming TC4M, where TC3CR must be set to 011.
Page 96
TMP86FM26UG
Note 6: To the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC3CR. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC4S and TFF4, respectively. Note 7: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 9-1 and Table 9-2. Note 8: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 93.
Table 9-1 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (NORMAL1/2 and IDLE1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input - - - - - TC4 pin input - - - - - - - -
Note 1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC3CK). Note 2: : Available source clock
Table 9-2 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input - - - - - TC4 pin input - - - - - - - -
Note1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC3CK). Note2: : Available source clock
Page 97
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86FM26UG
Table 9-3 Constraints on Register Values Being Compared
Operating mode 8-bit timer/event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer/event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 1 (TTREGn) 255 1 (TTREGn) 255 2 (PWREGn) 254 1 (TTREG4, 3) 65535 256 (TTREG4, 3) 65535 2 (PWREG4, 3) 65534 1 (PWREG4, 3) < (TTREG4, 3) 65535 16-bit PPG and (PWREG4, 3) + 1 < (TTREG4, 3) Register Value
Note: n = 3 to 4
Page 98
TMP86FM26UG
9.3 Function
The TimerCounter 3 and 4 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit event counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO), 8bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output modes. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 (TC3, 4) are cascadable to form a 16bit timer. The 16-bit timer has the operating modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes.
9.3.1
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register j (TTREGj) value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting.
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Table 9-4 Source Clock for TimerCounter 3, 4 (Internal Clock)
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - Resolution Maximum Time Setting
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns
244.14 s - - -
32.6 ms 2.0 ms 510 s 127.5 s
62.3 ms - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz and generating an interrupt 80 s later (TimerCounter4, fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD DI SET EI LD LD (TC4CR), 00010000B (TC4CR), 00011000B : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit timer mode. : Starts TC4. (EIRE). 1 : Enables INTTC4 interrupt. (TTREG4), 0AH : Sets the timer register (80 s/27/fc = 0AH).
Page 99
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86FM26UG
TC4CR
Internal Source Clock Counter
TTREG4
1
2
3
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 9-2 8-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC4) 9.3.2 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3, 4)
In the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TCj pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 Hz in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
TC4CR TC4 pin input
Counter
TTREG4
0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 9-3 8-Bit Event Counter Mode Timing Chart (TC4) 9.3.3 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC3, 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse with a 50% duty cycle from the PDOj pin. In the PDO mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the PDOj pin is switched to the opposite state and the up-counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at the time. The logic state opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level is output from the PDOj pin. An arbitrary value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj value is initialized to 0. To use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Page 100
TMP86FM26UG
Example :Generating 1024 Hz pulse using TC4 (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting port LD LD LD (TTREG4), 3DH (TC4CR), 00010001B (TC4CR), 00011001B : 1/1024/27/fc/2 = 3DH : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit PDO mode. : Starts TC4.
Note 1: In the programmable divider output mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the programmable divider output mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PDO output, the PDOj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR setting upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PDOj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PDOj pin to the high level. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Page 101
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Write of "1"
Internal source clock n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 3 0
Figure 9-4 8-Bit PDO Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
Match detect Match detect Match detect
Page 102
Counter
0
1
2
TTREG4
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F4
Set F/F
PDO4 pin
INTTC4 interrupt request
Held at the level when the timer is stopped
TMP86FM26UG
TMP86FM26UG
9.3.4
8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3, 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. The up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the PWREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at this time. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWMj pin is the opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level.) Since PWREGj in the PWM mode is serially connected to the shift register, the value set to PWREGj can be changed while the timer is running. The value set to PWREGj during a run of the timer is shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREGj. While the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immediately after the programming of PWREGj. If executing the read instruction to PWREGj during PWM output, the value in the shift register is read, but not the value set in PWREGj. Therefore, after writing to PWREGj, the reading data of PWREGj is previous value until INTTCj is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREGj immediately after the INTTCj interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTCj interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTCj interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWMj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWMj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PWMj pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode during PWM output, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWMj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode. Note 4: j = 3, 4
Table 9-5 PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
Resolution SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - -
Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 32.8 ms 2.05 ms 512 s 128 s 7.81 ms 32 s 16 s fs = 32.768 kHz 62.5 ms - - - 7.81 ms - -
DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
Page 103
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Internal source clock n
Write to PWREG4
Counter
0
1
n+1
FF
0
1
n
n+1
FF
0
1
m
m+1
FF
0
1
p
Write to PWREG4
PWREG4
? Shift Shift m
Match detect
n
m
p Shift p
Match detect Match detect
Figure 9-5 8-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
Page 104
n One cycle period m
Shift
Shift registar
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F4
PWM4 pin
n
p
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86FM26UG
TMP86FM26UG
9.3.5
16-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timer. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. Program the lower byte and upper byte in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj, and PPGj pins may output a pulse. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming of TTREGj. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Table 9-6 Source Clock for 16-Bit Timer Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - Maximum Time Setting fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz, and generating an interrupt 300 ms later (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD (TC3CR), 13H :Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 16-bit timer mode (lower byte). : Sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer. (EIRE). 1 : Enables INTTC4 interrupt. (TTREG3), 927CH : Sets the timer register (300 ms/27/fc = 927CH).
LD LD
(TC4CR), 04H (TC4CR), 0CH
TC4CR
Internal source clock Counter
TTREG3 (Lower byte) TTREG4 (Upper byte)
0
1
2
3
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
0
?
n
?
m
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 9-6 16-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
Page 105
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86FM26UG
9.3.6
16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge to the TC3 pin. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit event counter. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TC3 pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/ 2 in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Program the lower byte (TTREG3), and upper byte (TTREG4) in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
4 Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
9.3.7
16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form the 16-bit PWM signal generator. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG3, PWREG4) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC4 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F4 by TC4CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F4 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWM4 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F4 logic level.) Since PWREG4 and 3 in the PWM mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to PWREG4 and 3 can be changed while the timer is running. The values set to PWREG4 and 3 during a run of the timer are shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREG4 and 3. While the timer is stopped, the values are shifted immediately after the programming of PWREG4 and 3. Set the lower byte (PWREG3) and upper byte (PWREG4) in this order to program PWREG4 and 3. (Programming only the lower or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.) If executing the read instruction to PWREG4 and 3 during PWM output, the values set in the shift register is read, but not the values set in PWREG4 and 3. Therefore, after writing to the PWREG4 and 3, reading data of PWREG4 and 3 is previous value until INTTC4 is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREG4 and 3 immediately after the INTTC4 interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTC4 interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWM4 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC4CR after the timer is stopped. Do not program TC4CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWM4 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
Page 106
TMP86FM26UG
CLR (TC4CR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TC4CR).7 : Sets the PWM4 pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping of the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWM4 pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Table 9-7 16-Bit PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - - Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms 2s 8.2 ms 4.1 ms fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - - 2s - -
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LD (PWREG3), 07D0H (TC3CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and 16-bit PWM output mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PWM signal generation mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC4CR), 056H (TC4CR), 05EH
Page 107
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Internal source clock an
Write to PWREG3
Counter
0
1
an+1
FFFF
0
1
an
an+1
FFFF
0
1
bm bm+1
Write to PWREG3
FFFF
0
1
cp
PWREG3 (Lower byte)
?
Write to PWREG4
n
m
p
Write to PWREG4
Figure 9-7 16-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
Page 108
b Shift Shift bm
Match detect an One cycle period bm
PWREG4 (Upper byte)
?
a
c Shift cp
Match detect Match detect
Shift
16-bit shift register
?
an
Match detect
Timer F/F4
PWM4 pin
an
cp
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86FM26UG
TMP86FM26UG
9.3.8
16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)
This mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16-bits of resolution. The timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to enter the 16-bit PPG mode. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG3, PWREG4) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state again when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC4 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/ 2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F4 by TC4CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F4 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PPG4 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F4.) Set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (TTREG3 TTREG4, PWREG3 PWREG4) (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) For PPG output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LDW LD (PWREG3), 07D0H (TTREG3), 8002H (TC3CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the cycle period. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and16-bit PPG mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PPG mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC4CR), 057H (TC4CR), 05FH
Note 1: In the PPG mode, do not change the PWREGi and TTREGi settings while the timer is running. Since PWREGi and TTREGi are not in the shift register configuration in the PPG mode, the new values programmed in PWREGi and TTREGi are in effect immediately after programming PWREGi and TTREGi. Therefore, if PWREGi and TTREGi are changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PPG output, the PPG4 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC4CR after the timer is stopped. Do not change TC4CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PPG4 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TC4CR).3: Stops the timer CLR (TC4CR).7: Sets the PPG4 pin to the high level Note 3: i = 3, 4
Page 109
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Write of "0"
Internal source clock 1 mn mn+1 qr-1 qr 0 1 mn mn+1 1 qr-1 qr 0 mn mn+1 0
Counter
0
PWREG3 (Lower byte)
?
n
Figure 9-8 16-Bit PPG Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
Page 110
Match detect Match detect Match detect mn mn
PWREG4 (Upper byte)
?
m
Match detect
Match detect
TTREG3 (Lower byte)
?
r
TTREG4 (Upper byte)
?
q F/F clear Held at the level when the timer stops
mn
Timer F/F4
PPG4 pin
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86FM26UG
TMP86FM26UG
9.3.9
Warm-Up Counter Mode
In this mode, the warm-up period time is obtained to assure oscillation stability when the system clocking is switched between the high-frequency and low-frequency. The timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit TimerCounter. The warm-up counter mode has two types of mode; switching from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and vice-versa.
Note 1: In the warm-up counter mode, fix TCiCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOi, PWMi and PPGi pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the warm-up counter mode, only upper 8 bits of the timer register TTREG4 and 3 are used for match detection and lower 8 bits are not used. Note 3: i = 3, 4
9.3.9.1
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the low-frequency clock fs to oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the low-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG4, 3) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC4 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine, set SYSCR2 to 1 to switch the system clock from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and then clear of SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the high-frequency clock.
Table 9-8 Setting Time of Low-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (fs = 32.768 kHz)
Minimum Time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = 0100H) 7.81 ms Maximum Time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = FF00H) 1.99 s
Example :After checking low-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC4 and 3, switching to the SLOW1 mode
SET LD LD LD DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR SET (TC4CR).3 : (TC4CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops TC4 and 3. : SYSCR2 1 (Switches the system clock to the low-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the high-frequency clock.) (EIRE). 1 (SYSCR2).6 (TC3CR), 43H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG3), 8000H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF3=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF4=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 : Enables the INTTC4. : IMF 1 : Starts TC4 and 3.
CLR RETI : VINTTC4: DW
(SYSCR2).7
: PINTTC4 : INTTC4 vector table
Page 111
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86FM26UG
9.3.9.2
High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the high-frequency clock fc to the oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the high-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG4, 3) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC4 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine, clear SYSCR2 to 0 to switch the system clock from the low-frequency to high-frequency, and then SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the low-frequency clock.
Table 9-9 Setting Time in High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
Minimum time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = 0100H) 16 s Maximum time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = FF00H) 4.08 ms
Example :After checking high-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC4 and 3, switching to the NORMAL1 mode
SET LD LD LD (SYSCR2).7 (TC3CR), 63H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG3), 0F800H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF3=0, source clock fc, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF4=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 (EIRE). 1 : Enables the INTTC4. : IMF 1 (TC4CR).3 : (TC4CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops the TC4 and 3. : SYSCR2 0 (Switches the system clock to the high-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the low-frequency clock.) : Starts the TC4 and 3.
DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR CLR
CLR
(SYSCR2).6
RETI : VINTTC4: DW : PINTTC4 : INTTC4 vector table
Page 112
TMP86FM26UG
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration
PWM mode
Overflow
fc/211 or fs/23 INTTC6 interrupt request
fc/2 5 fc/2 fc/23
7
fs
fc/2 fc
TC6 pin TC6M TC6S TFF6
A B C D E F G H S
Y
A B S
Y
Clear
8-bit up-counter
TC6S
PDO, PPG mode
A 16-bit mode
16-bit mode
Y B S S A Y B
Timer, Event Counter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F6
PDO6/PWM6/ PPG6 pin
TC6CK TC6CR TTREG6 PWREG6
PWM, PPG mode
DecodeEN
TFF6
PDO, PWM, PPG mode
16-bit mode
TC5S fc/211 or fs/23
fc/2 5 fc/2 3 fc/2
fs
7
fc/2 fc
TC5M TC5S
A B C D E F G S
Clear Y
8-bit up-counter Overflow 16-bit mode
INTTC5 interrupt request
Timer mode
TC5CK TC5CR TTREG5 PWREG5
Figure 10-1 8-Bit TimerCounter 5, 6
Page 113
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86FM26UG
10.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 5 is controlled by the TimerCounter 5 control register (TC5CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG5, PWREG5). TimerCounter 5 Timer Register
TTREG5 (001EH) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG5 (0022H) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG5) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG5) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 5 Control Register
TC5CR (001AH) 7 6 5 TC5CK 4 3 TC5S 2 1 TC5M 0 (Initial value: *000 0000)
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 TC5CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC5S TC5 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: TC5M TC5M operating mode select 010: 011: 1**: Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer Reserved Reserved 16-bit mode (Each mode is selectable with TC6M.) Reserved fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc Reserved
SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - fc (Note 8) R/W
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock[Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC5M, TC5CK and TFF5 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC5S= 1 0), do not change the TC5M and TC5CK settings. To start the timer operation (TC5S= 0 1), TC5M and TC5CK can be programmed. Note 4: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, set the operating mode by programming TC6CR, where TC5M must be fixed to 011. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC5CK. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC6CR and TC6CR, respectively. Note 6: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 10-1 and Table 10-2. Note 7: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 103. Note 8: The operating clock fc in the SLOW or SLEEP mode can be used only as the high-frequency warm-up mode.
Page 114
TMP86FM26UG
The TimerCounter 6 is controlled by the TimerCounter 6 control register (TC6CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG6 and PWREG6). TimerCounter 6 Timer Register
TTREG6 (001FH) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG6 (0023H) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG6) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG6) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 6 Control Register
TC6CR (001BH) 7 TFF6 6 5 TC6CK 4 3 TC6S 2 1 TC6M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF6
Timer F/F6 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc TC6 pin input
3
R/W SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - - R/W
000 001 TC6CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC6S TC6 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: TC6M TC6M operating mode select 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc
3
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode Reserved 16-bit timer/event counter mode Warm-up counter mode 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit PPG mode
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC6S= 1 0), do not change the TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 settings. To start the timer operation (TC6S= 0 1), TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 can be programmed. Note 4: When TC6M= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the source clock becomes the TC5 overflow signal regardless of the TC6CK setting. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming TC6M, where TC5CR must be set to 011.
Page 115
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86FM26UG
Note 6: To the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC5CR. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC6S and TFF6, respectively. Note 7: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 10-1 and Table 10-2. Note 8: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 103. Note 9: To use the PDO, PWM or PPG mode, a pulse is not output from the timer output pin when TC1CR2 is set to 1. To output a pulse from the timer output pin, clear TC1CR2 to 0.
Table 10-1 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (NORMAL1/2 and IDLE1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/2 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - -
3
fc/27
fc/25
fc/23
fs
fc/2
fc
TC5 pin input - - - - - - - -
TC6 pin input - - - - - - -
- -
- -
- -
- - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
Note 1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC5CK). Note 2: : Available source clock
Table 10-2 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC5 pin input - - - - - - - - TC6 pin input - - - - - - -
Note1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC5CK). Note2: : Available source clock
Page 116
TMP86FM26UG
Table 10-3 Constraints on Register Values Being Compared
Operating mode 8-bit timer/event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 1 (TTREGn) 255 1 (TTREGn) 255 2 (PWREGn) 254 1 (TTREG6, 5) 65535 256 (TTREG6, 5) 65535 2 (PWREG6, 5) 65534 1 (PWREG6, 5) < (TTREG6, 5) 65535 16-bit PPG and (PWREG6, 5) + 1 < (TTREG6, 5) Register Value
Note: n = 5 to 6
Page 117
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86FM26UG
10.3 Function
The TimerCounter 6 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit event counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO), 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output modes. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 (TC5, 6) are cascadable to form a 16-bit timer. The 16-bit timer has the operating modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, warm-up counter, 16bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes.
10.3.1 8-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register j (TTREGj) value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting.
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
Table 10-4 Source Clock for TimerCounter 5, 6 (Internal Clock)
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - Resolution Maximum Time Setting
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns
244.14 s - - -
32.6 ms 2.0 ms 510 s 127.5 s
62.3 ms - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz and generating an interrupt 80 s later (TimerCounter6, fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD DI SET EI LD LD (TC6CR), 00010000B (TC6CR), 00011000B : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit timer mode. : Starts TC6. (EIRE). 3 : Enables INTTC6 interrupt. (TTREG6), 0AH : Sets the timer register (80 s/27/fc = 0AH).
Page 118
TMP86FM26UG
TC6CR
Internal Source Clock Counter
TTREG6
1
2
3
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 10-2 8-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC6) 10.3.2 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC6)
In the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TCj pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 Hz in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 6
TC6CR TC6 pin input
Counter
TTREG6
0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 10-3 8-Bit Event Counter Mode Timing Chart (TC6) 10.3.3 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse with a 50% duty cycle from the PDOj pin. In the PDO mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the PDOj pin is switched to the opposite state and the up-counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at the time. The logic state opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level is output from the PDOj pin. An arbitrary value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj value is initialized to 0. To use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Page 119
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86FM26UG
Example :Generating 1024 Hz pulse using TC6 (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting port LD LD LD (TTREG6), 3DH (TC6CR), 00010001B (TC6CR), 00011001B : 1/1024/27/fc/2 = 3DH : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit PDO mode. : Starts TC6.
Note 1: In the programmable divider output mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the programmable divider output mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PDO output, the PDOj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR setting upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PDOj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PDOj pin to the high level. Note 3: j = 6
Page 120
TC6CR
TC6CR
Write of "1"
Internal source clock n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 3 0
Figure 10-4 8-Bit PDO Mode Timing Chart (TC6)
Match detect Match detect Match detect
Page 121
Counter
0
1
2
TTREG6
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F6
Set F/F
PDO6 pin
INTTC6 interrupt request
Held at the level when the timer is stopped
TMP86FM26UG
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86FM26UG
10.3.4 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. The up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the PWREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at this time. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWMj pin is the opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level.) Since PWREGj in the PWM mode is serially connected to the shift register, the value set to PWREGj can be changed while the timer is running. The value set to PWREGj during a run of the timer is shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREGj. While the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immediately after the programming of PWREGj. If executing the read instruction to PWREGj during PWM output, the value in the shift register is read, but not the value set in PWREGj. Therefore, after writing to PWREGj, the reading data of PWREGj is previous value until INTTCj is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREGj immediately after the INTTCj interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTCj interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTCj interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWMj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWMj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PWMj pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode during PWM output, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWMj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode. Note 4: j = 6
Table 10-5 PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
Resolution SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - -
Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 32.8 ms 2.05 ms 512 s 128 s 7.81 ms 32 s 16 s fs = 32.768 kHz 62.5 ms - - - 7.81 ms - -
DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
Page 122
TC6CR
TC6CR
Internal source clock n
Write to PWREG6
Counter
0
1
n+1
FF
0
1
n
n+1
FF
0
1
m
m+1
FF
0
1
p
Write to PWREG6
PWREG6
? Shift Shift m
Match detect
n
m
p Shift p
Match detect Match detect
Figure 10-5 8-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC6)
Page 123
n One cycle period m
Shift
Shift registar
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F6
PWM6 pin
n
p
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP86FM26UG
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86FM26UG
10.3.5 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timer. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, an INTTC6 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. Program the lower byte and upper byte in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj, and PPGj pins may output a pulse. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming of TTREGj. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
Table 10-6 Source Clock for 16-Bit Timer Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - Maximum Time Setting fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz, and generating an interrupt 300 ms later (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD (TC5CR), 13H :Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 16-bit timer mode (lower byte). : Sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer. (EIRE). 3 : Enables INTTC6 interrupt. (TTREG5), 927CH : Sets the timer register (300 ms/27/fc = 927CH).
LD LD
(TC6CR), 04H (TC6CR), 0CH
TC6CR
Internal source clock Counter
TTREG5 (Lower byte) TTREG6 (Upper byte)
0
1
2
3
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
0
?
n
?
m
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 10-6 16-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
Page 124
TMP86FM26UG
10.3.6 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form the 16-bit PWM signal generator. The counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG5, PWREG6) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC6 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC5 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F6 by TC6CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F6 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWM6 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F6 logic level.) Since PWREG6 and 5 in the PWM mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to PWREG6 and 5 can be changed while the timer is running. The values set to PWREG6 and 5 during a run of the timer are shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREG6 and 5. While the timer is stopped, the values are shifted immediately after the programming of PWREG6 and 5. Set the lower byte (PWREG5) and upper byte (PWREG6) in this order to program PWREG6 and 5. (Programming only the lower or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.) If executing the read instruction to PWREG6 and 5 during PWM output, the values set in the shift register is read, but not the values set in PWREG6 and 5. Therefore, after writing to the PWREG6 and 5, reading data of PWREG6 and 5 is previous value until INTTC6 is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREG6 and 5 immediately after the INTTC6 interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTC6 interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWM6 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC6CR after the timer is stopped. Do not program TC6CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWM6 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TC6CR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TC6CR).7 : Sets the PWM6 pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping of the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWM6 pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Table 10-7 16-Bit PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/2 fc/2 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc
7 5 3
Resolution SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - -
Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms 2s 8.2 ms 4.1 ms fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - - 2s - -
DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2 fc/2
7 5 3
fs fc/2 fc
Page 125
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86FM26UG
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LD (PWREG5), 07D0H (TC5CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and 16-bit PWM output mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF6 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PWM signal generation mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC6CR), 056H (TC6CR), 05EH
Page 126
TC6CR
TC6CR
Internal source clock an
Write to PWREG5
Counter
0
1
an+1
FFFF
0
1
an
an+1
FFFF
0
1
bm bm+1
Write to PWREG5
FFFF
0
1
cp
PWREG5 (Lower byte)
?
Write to PWREG6
n
m
p
Write to PWREG6
Figure 10-7 16-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
Page 127
b Shift Shift bm
Match detect an One cycle period bm
PWREG6 (Upper byte)
?
a
c Shift cp
Match detect Match detect
Shift
16-bit shift register
?
an
Match detect
Timer F/F6
PWM6 pin
an
cp
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP86FM26UG
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86FM26UG
10.3.7 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)
This mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16-bits of resolution. The timer counter 5 and 6 are cascadable to enter the 16-bit PPG mode. The counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG5, PWREG6) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state again when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC6 interrupt is generated at this time. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F6 by TC6CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F6 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PPG6 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F6.) Set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (TTREG5 TTREG6, PWREG5 PWREG6) (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) For PPG output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LDW LD (PWREG5), 07D0H (TTREG5), 8002H (TC5CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the cycle period. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and16-bit PPG mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF6 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PPG mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC6CR), 057H (TC6CR), 05FH
Note 1: In the PPG mode, do not change the PWREGi and TTREGi settings while the timer is running. Since PWREGi and TTREGi are not in the shift register configuration in the PPG mode, the new values programmed in PWREGi and TTREGi are in effect immediately after programming PWREGi and TTREGi. Therefore, if PWREGi and TTREGi are changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PPG output, the PPG6 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC6CR after the timer is stopped. Do not change TC6CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PPG6 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TC6CR).3: Stops the timer CLR (TC6CR).7: Sets the PPG6 pin to the high level Note 3: i = 5, 6
Page 128
TC6CR
TC6CR
Write of "0"
Internal source clock 1 mn mn+1 qr-1 qr 0 1 mn mn+1 1 qr-1 qr 0 mn mn+1 0
Counter
0
PWREG5 (Lower byte)
?
n
Figure 10-8 16-Bit PPG Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
Page 129
Match detect Match detect Match detect mn mn
PWREG6 (Upper byte)
?
m
Match detect
Match detect
TTREG5 (Lower byte)
?
r
TTREG6 (Upper byte)
?
q F/F clear Held at the level when the timer stops
mn
Timer F/F6
PPG6 pin
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP86FM26UG
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86FM26UG
10.3.8 Warm-Up Counter Mode
In this mode, the warm-up period time is obtained to assure oscillation stability when the system clocking is switched between the high-frequency and low-frequency. The timer counter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit TimerCounter. The warm-up counter mode has two types of mode; switching from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and vice-versa.
Note 1: In the warm-up counter mode, fix TCiCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOi, PWMi and PPGi pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the warm-up counter mode, only upper 8 bits of the timer register TTREG6 and 5 are used for match detection and lower 8 bits are not used. Note 3: i = 5, 6
10.3.8.1 Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the low-frequency clock fs to oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the low-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG6, 5) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC6 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine, set SYSCR2 to 1 to switch the system clock from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and then clear of SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the high-frequency clock. Table 10-8 Setting Time of Low-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (fs = 32.768 kHz)
Minimum Time Setting (TTREG6, 5 = 0100H) 7.81 ms Maximum Time Setting (TTREG6, 5 = FF00H) 1.99 s
Example :After checking low-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC6 and 5, switching to the SLOW1 mode
SET LD LD LD DI SET EI SET : PINTTC6: CLR SET (TC6CR).3 : (TC6CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops TC6 and 5. : SYSCR2 1 (Switches the system clock to the low-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the high-frequency clock.) (EIRE). 3 (SYSCR2).6 (TC5CR), 43H (TC6CR), 05H (TTREG5), 8000H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF5=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF6=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 : Enables the INTTC6. : IMF 1 : Starts TC6 and 5.
CLR RETI : VINTTC6: DW
(SYSCR2).7
: PINTTC6 : INTTC6 vector table
Page 130
TMP86FM26UG
10.3.8.2 High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the high-frequency clock fc to the oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the high-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG6, 5) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC6 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine, clear SYSCR2 to 0 to switch the system clock from the low-frequency to high-frequency, and then SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the low-frequency clock. Table 10-9 Setting Time in High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
Minimum time Setting (TTREG6, 5 = 0100H) 16 s Maximum time Setting (TTREG6, 5 = FF00H) 4.08 ms
Example :After checking high-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC6 and 5, switching to the NORMAL1 mode
SET LD LD LD (SYSCR2).7 (TC5CR), 63H (TC6CR), 05H (TTREG5), 0F800H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF5=0, source clock fc, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF6=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 (EIRE). 3 : Enables the INTTC6. : IMF 1 (TC6CR).3 : (TC6CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops the TC6 and 5. : SYSCR2 0 (Switches the system clock to the high-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the low-frequency clock.) : Starts the TC6 and 5.
DI SET EI SET : PINTTC6: CLR CLR
CLR
(SYSCR2).6
RETI : VINTTC6: DW : PINTTC6 : INTTC6 vector table
Page 131
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86FM26UG
Page 132
TMP86FM26UG
11. Real-Time Clock (RTC)
The TMP86FM26UG incorporates a real-time clock (RTC) with the auto calendar function. Clock and calendar counting can be performed using a high-frequency or low-frequency clock as the reference clock. The RTC of the TMP86FM26UG has the following features.
Note: Interrupt latch IL20 (bit 4 of ILE register) may be set to "1" while Real-Time Clock is operated. Therefore, the interrupt enable register EF20 (bit 4 of EIRE register) should be always set to "0" to prevent the unexpected interrupt request. Also, if ILE register is read, value of bit 4 should be not used by program.
* Clock (hours, minutes, seconds) and calendar (leap year, year, month, day, day of the week) counting function (BCD code) * 2 channels of 20-bit counters The RTC comprises RTC counter 1 (high-frequency or low-frequency) and RTC counter 2 (low-frequency only). * 1Hz pulse output function The RTCOUT pin can output pulses equivalent to 1Hz. * Software capture of 20-bit RTC counters (RTC counters 1, 2) Each RTC counter value can be read while the RTC is running. When the system is operating in the dualclock mode and the low-frequency clock is used as the source clock, RTC counter 2 can be used for detecting a stop condition in the low-frequency oscillator (deadlock detection). * Leap year function Leap years are realized by using a leap year register (which counts from 0 to 3) independent of the year counter. * Clock error correction function A 20-bit register is provided to correct the number of clock counts per second. This function makes it possible to reduce clock errors caused by the variations inherent in each external resonator or the effects of load capacitance. Error correction can be performed on a basis of 1 ppm for high-frequency and 30.5 ppm for low-frequency. * Clock error measurement function In the error measurement mode, a 20-bit timer counter can be run in the free run mode using the precise reference clock (on a second basis) input to the RTCIN pin as the window pulse. By using this function, the value to be set in the compare register can easily be obtained. The output of RTC counter 1 based on the high-frequency source clock can be fed back to the input of RTC counter 2. This allows the user to adjust RTC counter 1 (high-frequency error) in one second and then to adjust RTC counter 2 (low-frequency error) on a stand-alone basis using 16 seconds in the pre-shipment adjustment process. * A wide range of operating frequencies Because the number of clock counts per second is adjustable, 30.000 kHz to 34.000 kHz can be used as the low-frequency clock and 1 MHz to 16 MHz can be used as the high-frequency clock. * Clock/calendar value preserving function The RTC counters and clock/calendar counters are not initialized by external or internal reset and the count values can be preserved. (The RTC is stopped by reset.)
Page 133
11. Real-Time Clock (RTC)
11.1 Configuration TMP86FM26UG
11.1 Configuration
Data bus
DIVRG2H,M,L
Clear
000 Y =000
S
DIVRG1H,M,L
Clear
1Hz output circuit
Clock counter lock control
EN DIS1SC Clear
RTCOUT
EN
20-bit counter
20-bit counter Shift register (buffer)
Match
000
RTREGL RTREGM RTREGH
Y
fs
ENATC2
001 010 011 100 101 110 111 1234
EN Data bus
fc
S
00 01 10 11 S 1 0
Y
RTCIN
S
Y
EN
12345
3
2
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
SCLOCK
DIS1SC RSTDIV RSTCLK ADJSEL
ADJEN2 ENATC2
ENATC1
ADJEN1
RTCCR2
RTCCR1
THOLD
ADJIN
WEEKR
Clear
SECR
MINR
HOURR
DAYR
MONTHR
YEARR
LEARP
Clear Data bus
Figure 11-1 RTC Block Diagram
Page 134
TMP86FM26UG
11.2 Control
The RTC is controlled by the RTC control register 1 (RTCCR1), RTC control register 2 (RTCCR2), RTC status register (RTCSR), clock counter registers (SECR, MINR, HOURR, DAYR, MONTHR, YEARR, WEEKR, LEAPR), RTC counter compare register (RTREG1L/M/H), and RTC counter 1/2 monitor registers (DIVRG1L/M/H, DIVRG2L/M/H). RTC Control Register 1
RTCCR1 (0FA0H) 7 ENATC 1 6 ADJEN1 5 4 3 2 SCLOCK 1 0 THOLD Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
ENATC1
RTC counter 1 start control RTC counter 1 operation mode control
0: Timer stop 1: Timer start (The source clock must be selected by SCLOCK before starting the timer.) 0: Clock mode 1: Error measurement mode RTC counter 1 000: 001: 010: Stop fs fc fc/2 fc/4 fc/8 fc/16 fs R/W RTC counter 2 Stop
ADJEN1
SCLOCK
RTC counter source clock control [Hz]
011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
THOLD
Clock counter lock control
0: Count up by a match of RTC counter 1 1: Do not count up by a match of RTC counter 1
Page 135
11. Real-Time Clock (RTC)
11.2 Control TMP86FM26UG
RTC Control Register 2
RTCCR2 (0FA1H) 7 ENATC 2 6 ADJEN2 5 RSTDIV 4 RSTCLK 3 DIS1SC 2 ADJIN 1 ADJSEL 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
ENATC2
RTC counter 2 start control RTC counter 2 operation mode control RTC counter 1/2 initialization control Clock counter registers initialization control RTCOUT pin output control Reference clock input control
0: Timer stop 1: Timer start (The source clock must be selected by SCLOCK before starting the timer.) 0: Free run mode 1: Error measurement mode 0: - 1: Initialize RTC counters 1, 2 (This bit is automatically cleared to "0" after being set to "1".) 0: - 1: Initialize the clock counter registers (This bit is automatically cleared to "0" after being set to "1".) 0: No output 1: Output pulse equivalent to 1 second from RTCOUT pin 0: Input external input pulse on RTCIN pin 1: Input internal output pulse on RTCOUT pin 00: H level period of reference clock (Reference clock = Window pulse) 01: Reference clock divided by one (1 clock) 10: Reference clock divided by three (4 clocks) 11: Reference clock divided by five (16 clocks) R/W
ADJEN2
RSTDIV
RSTCLK
DIS1SC ADJIN
ADJSEL
Window pulse width select
Note 1: RTCCR2 are automatically cleared to "0" after being set to "1". Note 2: Before writing to RTCCR1, make sure that the RTC has stopped completely. This state can be confirmed by RTCSR = "0" after setting RTCCR1 and RTCCR2 to "0". Note 3: Before writing to or reading from the clock counter registers, set RTCCR1 to "1" and then check that RTCSR has become "1". After writing to or reading from the clock counter registers, set RTCCR1 to "0" again. If the clock counter registers are written while RTCCR1 = "0", written values will not be reflected. Note 4: Changing RTCCR1 from "1" to "0" should be done while RTCSR = "1". Note 5: To start the error measurement mode, first set RTCCR2 to "1" and then set RTCCR1 simultaneously to "1" (RTCCR2 in the case of RTC counter 2). If these steps are not observed, measurement cannot be performed correctly. Note 6: When RTCCR1 and RTCCR2 are "1", RTC counters 1 and 2 stop counting if break processing is performed with a debugger. After the break is released, each counter will resume counting from where it stopped.
Page 136
TMP86FM26UG
RTC Status Register
RTCSR (0FA2H) 7 6 5 4 ADJF2 3 ADJF1 2 RTCF2 1 RTCF1 0 TLOCK Read Only (Initial value: ***0 0000)
ADJF2
RTC counter 2 operation mode monitor RTC counter 1 operation mode monitor RTC counter 2 operation status monitor
0: 1: 0: 1:
Free run mode active Error measurement mode active Clock mode active Error measurement mode active Free run mode Error measurement mode Measuremnt completed Before or during measurement Error measurement mode Measuremnt completed Before or during measurement Read only
ADJF1
RTCF2
0: 1:
RTC counter 2 inactive RTC counter 2 active Clock mode
RTCF1
RTC counter 1 operation status monitor
0: 1: 0:
RTC counter 1 inactive RTC counter 1 active
TLOCK
Clock counter lock status monitor
1:
Time counter count up enabled Time counter count up disabled (Time counter register read/write enabled)
Note 1: The value set in RTCCR2 is reflected in RTCSR after 4/fs [s] at the maximum. Note 2: The value set in RTCCR1 is reflected in RTCSR after 4/n [s] (n = clock selected by RTCCR1) at the maximum. Note 3: The value set in RTCCR2 is reflected in RTCSR after 4/fs [s] at the maximum. Note 4: The value set in RTCCR1 is reflected in RTCSR after 4/n [s] (n = clock selected by RTCCR1) at the maximum. Note 5: The value set in RTCCR1 is reflected in RTCSR after 4/n [s] (n = clock selected by RTCCR1) at the maximum. Note 6: When RTCCR1 and RTCCR2 are changed from "1" to "0", do not change the values in RTCCR1, RTCCR2 and the clock registers until RTCSR and become "0".
Page 137
11. Real-Time Clock (RTC)
11.2 Control TMP86FM26UG
RTC Counter 1 Monitor Register
DIVRG1L (0FA6H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read Only
DIVRG1M (0FA7H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read Only
DIVRG1H (0FA8H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read Only
Note: When DIVRG1H is read, bits 7 to 4 are read as "0".
RTC Counter 1 Compare Register
RTREG1L (0FA3H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 1111 1111)
RTREG1M (0FA4H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read/Write (Initial value: 1111 1111)
RTREG1H (0FA5H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 1111)
Note: When RTREG1H is read, bits 7 to 4 are read as "0".
Page 138
TMP86FM26UG
RTC Counter 2 Monitor Register
DIVRG2L (0FA9H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read Only
DIVRG2M (0FAAH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read Only
DIVRG2H (0FABH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read Only
Note: When DIVRG2H is read, bits 7 to 4 are read as "0".
Leap Year Register
LEAPR (0FB3H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
LEAP
Leap year counter setting
00: Leap year 01: Leap year + 1 year 10: Leap year + 2 years 11: Leap year + 3 years
R/W
Day-of-week Register
WEEKR (0FAFH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Year Register
YEARR (0FB2H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Month Register
MONTHR (0FB1H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0001)
Day Register
DAYR (0FB0H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0001)
Hours Register
HOURR (0FAEH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Page 139
11. Real-Time Clock (RTC)
11.2 Control TMP86FM26UG
Minutes Register
MINR (0FADH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Seconds Register
SECR (0FACH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Note 1: Each register should be set in BCD format in the following range. If a hexadecimal value or a value outside the specified range is set, counting cannot be performed correctly. SECR : 00-59 DAYR : 01-28, 29, 30, 31 (Note 2) WEEKR : 00-06 MIN : 00-59 MONTHR : 01-12 LEAPR : 00-03 HOURR : 00-23 YEARR : 00-99 Note 2: The range of values that can be set or counted in the DAYR register depends on the MONTHR and LEAPR registers. Set the DAYR register as shown below according to the year and month settings. If a value outside the specified range is set, counting cannot be performed correctly. DAYR 01-28 When MONTHR = 02H LEAPR 00H 01-29 When MONTHR = 02H LEAPR = 00H 01-30 When MONTHR = 04H, 06H, 09H, 11H 01-31 Others Note 3: Writing to empty bits in these registers has no effect, and empty bits are read as "0".
Page 140
TMP86FM26UG
11.2.1 RTC control registers
The first step in using the RTC is to select the source clock in RTCCR1. Then, RTC counter 1 can be started by setting RTCCR1 to "1". All the clock counters start counting by a match between the RTC counter 1 value and the RTC counter 1 compare register value. RTCCR2 is the start control register for RTC counter 2. This counter can be used to measure the error of the low-frequency clock (stand-alone operation) or to detect a stop condition in the low-frequency oscillator when the system is operating in the dual-clock mode. When STOP, SLEEP0, or IDLE0 mode is started, RTCCR1, RTCCR1, and RTCCR2 are initialized and the RTC stops. To start the RTC again after exiting each mode, it is necessary to set RTCCR1, RTCCR1, and RTCCR2 again.
11.2.2 Clock counter registers
There are eight clock counter registers: seconds register (SECR), minutes register (MINR), hours register (HOURR), day register (DAYR), month register (MONTHR), year register (YEARR), day-of-week register (WEEKR), and leap year register (LEAPR). All of these registers except the WEEKR and LEAPR registers count in BCD format. All the clock counter registers are not initialized by a hardware reset (external or internal) in order to preserve the current time. Therefore, be sure to initialize these registers upon power-on. To prevent inadvertent clearing, the clock counter registers cannot be initialized while the RTC is running. To initialize these registers, set RTCCR2 to "1" after the RTC has stopped completely. (This state can be confirmed by RTCSR = "0" after clearing RTCCR1 to "0".) When RTCSR = "1", the registers cannot be initialized even if RTCCR2 is set to "1". The clock counter registers are initialized to year 00, January 1, 00 hours, 00 minutes, 00 seconds, LEAPR = "0", and WEEKR = "0". When the leap year counter (LEAPR) is "0", the month counter (MONTHR) and the day counter (DAYR) operate to accommodate a leap year. Thus, the LEAPR register should be set to the remainder obtained by dividing the YEARR value by four. For example, if YEARR is "08H" (leap year), set LEAPR to "00H". If YEARR is "09H" (leap year + 1 year), set LEAPR to "01H". For the week counter (WEEKR), assign the values 0 through 6 to the days of the week by programming. The maximum value of the day counter (DAYR) varies depending on the month counter (MONTHR) and leap year counter (LEAPR). The clock counter registers must be written while the RTC is not running (RTCSR = "0") or the RTC count lock is enabled (RTCSR = "1"). Write operations are ineffective in any other conditions. If non-BCD data is written to the counters using BCD format, counting cannot be performed correctly.
11.2.3 RTC counters 1 and 2
RTC counters 1 and 2 are 20-bit up counters. The source clock for RTC counter 1 can be selected by RTCCR1. The source clock for RTC counter 2 is fixed to low-frequency. RTC counter 1 is compared with the RTC counter 1 compare register (RTREG1L/M/H) for a match. When a match occurs, one second is counted up in the clock ounter. The oscillator frequency can be corrected by changing the value set in the compare register. This compare function makes it possible to count each second more precisely. The frequency can be corrected on a basis of 1/fs = 30.5 ppm (fs = 32.768 kHz) for the low-frequency source clock and on a basis of 1/fc = 1 ppm (fc = 1 MHz) for the high-frequency source clock. It is also possible to enhance the precision of frequency correction further by changing the compare register value at fixed intervals by using INTRTC interrupts. RTC counters 1 and 2 are not initialized by a hardware reset (internal or external). To prevent inadvertent clearing, RTC counters 1 and 2 cannot be initialized while the RTC is running. To initialize these counters, set RTCCR2 to "1" after the RTC has stopped completely. (This state can be confirmed by
Page 141
11. Real-Time Clock (RTC)
11.2 Control TMP86FM26UG
RTCSR = "0" after clearing RTCCR1 and RTCCR2 to "0".) When RTCSR = "1", the RTC counter registers are not initialized even if RTCCR2 is set to "1". When the initialization is completed, RTC counters 1 and 2 are cleared to "00000H".
11.2.4 RTC counter monitor registers
The values in RTC counters 1 and 2 can be read out by using the RTC counter 1 and RTC counter 2 monitor registers (DIVRG1L/M/H, DIVRG2L/M/H). The RTC counter monitor registers have the capture function to prevent the counter values from counting up while they are being read. When DIVRG1L is read, the low-order, middle-order, and high-order digits of the count value are captured all at once to DIVRG1L/M/H. Thus, be sure to read DIVRG1L, DIVRG1M, and DIVRG1H in this order. (The values in DIVRG1L, DIVRG1M, and DIVRG1H are updated only when DIVRG1L is read.) Likewise, the high-order, middle-order, and low-order digits of the count value in RTC counter 2 are also captured all at once when DIVRG2L is read. If the RTC counter counts up while it is being captured, the correct value cannot be obtained. Therefore, to obtain the correct value, read the monitor registers twice and check that the same value is read by two consecutive reads.
Note:When the system clock is high-frequency, RTC counter 1 using the high-frequency source clock counts up faster than the instruction execution cycle. This means that the same value cannot be read from the low-order 8 bits by two consecutive reads. Therefore, only the high-order and middle-order 12 bits should be used to determine whether or not the same value is read by two consecutive reads. This also applies when the system clock is low-frequency and RTC counters 1 and 2 using the low-frequency source clock are to be read. For details, see Example 1 below.
Example 1 :This program shows how to read RTC counter 1 correctly. (When the system clock and source clock are both high-frequency, or when the system clock and source clock are both low-frequency)
LOOP: LD LD LD LD CMP JR CMP JR A, (DIVRG1L) L, (DIVRG1M) H, (DIVRG1H) A, (DIVRG1L) L, (DIVRG1M) NZ, LOOP H, (DIVRG1H) NZ, LOOP ; Read the low-order 8 bits of RTC counter 1 (first time). ; Read the middle-order 8 bits of RTC counter 1 (first time). ; Read the high-order 4 bits of RTC counter 1 (first time). ; Read the low-order 8 bits of RTC counter 1 (second time). ; Compare the middle-order 8 bits of RTC counter 1 with the first read data. ; If not match, read DIVRG1L again. ; Compare the high-order 4 bits of RTC counter 1 with the first read data. ; If not match read DIVRG1L again.
Example 2 :This program shows how to read RTC counter 2 correctly. (When the system clock is high-frequency and the source clock is low-frequency)
LOOP: LD LD LD CMP JR CMP JR CMP JR A, (DIVRG2L) L, (DIVRG2M) H, (DIVRG2H) A, (DIVRG2L) NZ, LOOP L, (DIVRG2M) NZ, LOOP H, (DIVRG2H) NZ, LOOP ; Read the low-order 8 bits of RTC counter 2 (first time). ; Read the middle-order 8 bits of RTC counter 2 (first time). ; Read the high-order 4 bits of RTC counter 2 (first time). ; Compare the low-order 8 bits of RTC counter 2 with the first read data. ; If not match, read DIVRG2L again. ; Compare the middle-order 8 bits of RTC counter 2 with the first read data. ; If not match, read DIVRG2L again. ; Compare the high-order 4 bits of counter 2 with the first read data. ; If not match, read DIVRG2L again.
Page 142
TMP86FM26UG
Internal clock RTCCR1 RTCSR RTREG1 X RTC counter 1 RTC counter 1 + 1 RTCCR2 Ignored because RTC is running Second match SECR MINR HOURR WEEKR DAYR MONTHR YEARR LEAPR 59 59 23 6 31 12 99 3 00 00 00 0 01 01 00 0 59 59 23 2 29 02 04 0 00 00 00 2 01 03 04 0 Counter clear 00000 X X 00001 0xF423F 123 234 0xF4240 0xF423F 012345678 123456789 0xF4240 0xF4240 0xF423F 012345678 123456789 0xF4240 0123456789 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Figure 11-2 RTC Operation Timing
Page 143
11. Real-Time Clock (RTC)
11.2 Control TMP86FM26UG
11.2.5 RTC counter 1 compare register
The RTC counter 1 compare register (RTREG1L/M/H) has a 2-stage structure. The value written to each compare register is reflected when a match is detected between the RTC counter 1 value and the compare register value written the last time around (when one second is counted up). If a write to RTREG1H/M/L and a match detection occurs at the same time, the unstable value being written is shifted and next match detection may deviate from the specified value. Therefore, each compare register must be written while the RTC is inactive or immediately after the one-second match is detected. While the RTC is inactive, the value written to the compare register is reflected immediately. Since the compare register comprises 3 bytes, if a match with RTC counter 1 occurs before 3 bytes have all been written, the desired value cannot be set for the next one second. For example, let us assume a case in which the current RTREG1 value is F8240H and this value should be set to F8180H for the next one second. If a one-second match is detected immediately after "80H" is written to RTREG1L, the RTREG1 value becomes F8280H and the intended one second cannot be realized (Figure 11-3). The RTC counter 1 compare register is initialized to the full count (FFFFFH) by a hardware reset.
Internal clock RTREG1L write 0x80 RTREG1M write 0x81 RTREG1H write 0x0F RTREG1[19:0] Second match RTCCR1 RTC start 0xF8180 0xF8140 0xF8240 0x40 RTREG is updated immediately while RTC is stopping. 0x82 0x0F 0x80 0x81 0x0F 0xF8280 RTREG is updated by second match while RTC is running. 0xF8180
Figure 11-3 RTC Counter 1 Compare Register Update Timing
Page 144
TMP86FM26UG
11.3 Function
11.3.1 Error measurement mode (RTCCR1)
The error measurement mode is the function of measuring one second for determining the value to be set in the RTC counter compare register (RTREG1L/M/H). An external reference clock (normally 1 Hz) capable of counting seconds precisely is input from the RTCIN pin as the window pulse, and the width of this pulse is counted with RTC counter 1. The input of an external reference clock can be enabled by setting RTCCR2 to "0". The window pulse width can be selected from four types in RTCCR2. The reference clock of 1 Hz can be divided to generate the window pulse of 1 second, 4 seconds, or 16 seconds. RTC counter 1 counts up while the window pulse is high. Error measurement can be performed more precisely as the window pulse becomes longer (although the measurement period also becomes longer.) The precision of error measurement can also be enhanced by increasing the source clock frequency. However, rotate operation is needed in this case. When the low-frequency source clock is used, it is recommended that error measurement be performed for 16 seconds for optimum results. The output of RTC counter 1 based on the high-frequency source clock can be fed back to the input of RTC counter 2. This feature allows the user to adjust RTC counter 1 (high-frequency error) in one second and then to adjust RTC counter 2 (low-frequency error) on a stand-alone basis using 16 seconds. In this way, the time needed for low-frequency error adjustment can be shortened in the pre-shipment adjustment process. When the window pulse goes low and error measurement finishes, RTCSR is set to "0" and then RTC counter n stops. After RTC counter stopped, clear RTCCR1 to "0", read the RTC counter monitor registers (DIVRGnL/M/H). (n=1,2) If the monitor registers overflowed in 16-second measurement, the clock counter registers should also be read. Then, calculate the clock count per second and set this value in the RTC counter 1 compare register (RTREG1L/M/H).
Note 1: To measure the error of RTC counter 2 based the output of RTC counter 1, set RTCCR2 to "1". Then, after confirming RTCSR = "1", start RTC counter 1. For details, see Example 2. Note 2: In the error measurement mode, an error of 1 source clock is generated at the rising and falling edges of the window pulse respectively (an error of 2 source clocks in total). For details, see Table 11-1 and Table 112. Note 3: When RTCCR2 (window pulse width select) is set to "00", set RTCCR1 to "1" and then check RTCSR = "1" before inputting "H" level on the RTCIN pin. If "H" level is input before RTCSR has become "1", the window pulse width may become shorter than intended.
Internal clock RTCCR1 RTCCR1 RTCIN pin input Internal signal Internal 5 bit counter RTC counter 1 1F 0 00 01 02 03 04 Measurement start 1 second 2 second 3 second 4 second
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Figure 11-4 Timing Example of 4-Clock Measurement
Page 145
11. Real-Time Clock (RTC)
11.3 Function TMP86FM26UG
Table 11-1 Measurement Error in the Error Measurement Mode (High-Frequency Source Clock)
Frequency [MHz] Measurement Period [seconds] Source Clock Measurement Error [ppm] 2 1 0.5 F4240H fc/2 fc fc/8 fc/4 8 1 fc/2 fc fc/4 4 fc/2 fc fc/2 2 fc 1 8 4 fc 4 2 fc fc/2 1 fc 2 16 1 fc 0.125 16 fc/2 fc/2 0.5 0.125 0.25 F4240H 4 16 8 0.25 1 8 2 fc/2 0.125 0.5 F4240H 16 4 fc fc/2 fc/2 1 2 0.125 0.25 F4240H FFFFFH 2 1 (Example 1) 16 8 0.5 0.25 2 1 F4240H 0.5 2 FFFFFH 4 1 FFFFFH F4240H 4 8 1 2 0.25 0.125 2 1 FFFFFH 8 16 (Example 3) 1 2 RTREG1 Set Value (at measurement) FFFFFH Count Loop Times
fc/16 fc/8 16 fc/4
1 2 4
Table 11-2 Measurement Error in the Error Measurement Mode (Low-Frequency Source Clock)
Frequency [kHz] Measurement Period [seconds] 1 32.768 4 16 fs Source Clock Measurement Error [ppm] 61.04 15.26 3.81 FFFFFH RTREG1/2 Set Value (at measurement) Count Loop Times 1 4 16 (Example 2)
Note 1: The value to be set in the RTC counter compare register is obtained by dividing the measurement value under each condition (RTC counter monitor register value) by the count loop times. If the source clock is high-frequency and the count loop times is "2" or larger, include the seconds register (SECR) in the calculation. For details, see Example 3. Note 2: The total error per second is calculated by "(1 source clock period / 2) + measurement error [ppm]". Thus, the maximum total error per second is "0.5 + measurement error [ppm]" for the high-frequency source clock and "15.25 + measurement error [ppm]" for the low-frequency source clock. The error in the "1 source clock period / 2" portion can be decreased in software processing of the clock mode by using the bits dropped by rotate operation in the error measurement mode.
Page 146
TMP86FM26UG
Example 1 :This program runs RTC counter 1 in the error measurement mode based on the RTCIN pin input. After measurement is done, the measurement data is stored in the RTC counter 1 compare register. Then, RTC counter 1 is run in the clock mode. (fc = 1 MHz, RTC counter 1 source clock = fc, precise 1 Hz external input from RTCIN pin, measurement period = 1 second)
LD LD LD LD LD LD LD LOOP1: TEST JRS (RTCSR). 1 F, LOOP1 ; Loop until RTC counter 1 stops. HL, RTREG1L DE, RTREG1H (HL), 0FFFFH (DE), 0FH (RTCCR1), 0000_0100B (RTCCR2), 0011_0001B (RTCCR1), 1100_0100B ; RTREG1M,L = FFFFH ; RTREG1H = 0FH ; Set the source clock to fc. ; Initialize RTC counters, set for RTCIN pin input, and set the window pulse to 1 second. ; Start RTC counter 1 in the error measurement mode.
LD LD LD LD LD
(RTCCR1), 0000_0100B WA, (DIVRG1L) (RTREG1L), WA A, (DIVRG1H) (RTREG1H), A
; Stop RTC counter 1. ; Read the counter monitor register and store value in the compare register.
;Read the counter monitor register and store value in the compare register.
LD
(RTCCR1), 1000_0100B
; Start RTC counter 1 in the clock mode.
Page 147
11. Real-Time Clock (RTC)
11.3 Function TMP86FM26UG
Example 2 :This program runs RTC counter 2 in the error measurement mode based on RTC counter 1. When measurement is done, the measurement data is stored at addresses 40 to 42 in RAM. (fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz, RTC counter 1 source clock = fc/16, measurement period = 16 seconds)
LD LD LD LD LD LD LD LOOP1: TEST JRS LD LOOP2: TEST JRS (RTCSR). 2 F, LOOP2 ; Loop until RTC counter 2 stops. (RTCSR). 4 T, LOOP1 (RTCCR1), 1000_1100B ; Start RTC counter 1 in the clock mode. ; Wait for RTC counter 2 to enter the error measurement mode. HL, RTREG1L DE, RTREG1H (HL), 4240H (DE), 0FH (RTCCR1), 0000_1100B (RTCCR2), 0010_0111B (RTCCR2), 1110_0111B ; RTREG1M, L = 4240H (measurement value = 0F4240H) ; RTREG1H = 0FH ; Set the source clock to fc/16. ; Initialize RTC counters, set for RTCOUT pin internal output pulse,and set the window pulse width to 16 seconds. ; Start RTC counter 2 in the error measurement mode.
LD LD LD LD LD
(RTCCR2), 0000_0111B WA, (DIVRG2L) (40H), WA A, (DIVRG2H) (42H), A
; Stop RTC counter 2.
Page 148
TMP86FM26UG
Example 3 :This program runs RTC counter 1 in the error measurement mode based on the RTCIN pin input. When measurement is done, the measurement data is stored in the RTC counter 1 compare register. Then, RTC 1 counter is run in the clock mode. (fc = 16 MHz, RTC counter 1 source clock = fc, precise 1 Hz external input from RTCIN pin, measurement period = 1 second)
LD LD LD LD LD LD LD LOOP1: TEST JRS (RTCSR). 1 F, LOOP1 ; Loop until RTC counter 1 stops. HL, RTREG1L DE, RTREG1H (HL), 4240H (DE), 0FH (RTCCR1), 0000_0100B (RTCCR2), 0011_0001B (RTCCR1), 1100_0100B ; RTREG1M, L = 4240H ; RTREG1H = 0FH ; Set source clock to fc. ; Initialize RTC counters, set for RTCIN pin input, and set the window pulse width to 1 second. ; Start RTC counter 1 in the error measurement mode.
LD sShift: LD LD LD RORD LD LD RORD LD CMP JR CMP JR JR s16sec: ADD JR s15sec: LD SUB LD SUB sSecend: LD LD LD
(RTCCR1), 0000_0100B
; Stop RTC counter 1. ; Shift 4 bits to the right (rotate operation).
WA, (DIVRG1L) (RTREG1L), A A, W A, (RTREG1L) (RTREG1M), A A, (DIVRG1H) A, (RTREG1M) WA, (RTREG1L) (SECR), 10H Z, s16sec (SECR), 0FH Z, s15sec sError ; If SECR = 15 seconds, go to s15sec. ; In other cases, go to sError. ; If SECR = 16 seconds, go to s16sec. ; Store data in compare register (middle-order). ; Store data in the compare register (low-order).
WA, 4240H sSecend
HL, 0F424H HL, WA WA, 4240H WA, HL
(RTREG1L), WA A, 0FH (RTREG1H), A ; Store data in the compare register (high-order).
LD : sError:
(RTCCR1), 1000_1100B : :
; Start RTC counter 1 in the clock mode (fc/16).
; Go to error processing.
Page 149
11. Real-Time Clock (RTC)
11.3 Function TMP86FM26UG
11.3.2 Clock counter lock control (RTCCR1)
If the counting up of one second occurs while the clock counter register is being accessed, the correct time may not be obtained or written. To avoid this phenomenon, the counting up of the clock counters can be suspended. When RTCCR1 is set to "1", the count up operation is suspended after RTCSR becomes "1". If the counting up of one second occurs while the count up operation is suspended, this one second will be counted up as soon as the count up operation is enabled again.
Note:If is only one second that can be held by this function. If the counting up of one second occurs multiple times while the count up operation is suspended, the clock counter will advance only one second after the count up operation is enabled again.
Internal clock RTCCR1 RTCSR Second match SECR Second hold SECR write Execute LD (SECR),0x38 00 01 02 03 38 39
Figure 11-5 Count Up Control Timing Diagram
Example 1 :This program suspends the count up operation and writes to the clock counter registers while RTC counter 1 is running. (The seconds and minutes registers are at addresses 40H and 41H in RAM, respectively.)
LD LD SET LOOP: TEST JRS (DE). 0 T, LOOP ; Wait until TLOCK = "1". HL, RTCCR1 DE, RTCSR (HL). 0 ; Set THOLD to "1".
LD LD LD
IX, SECR A, (40H) (IX), A ; Set the seconds register.
LD LD LD
IX, MINR A, (41H) (IX), A ; Set the minutes register.
CLR
(HL). 0
; Clear THOLD to "0".
Page 150
TMP86FM26UG
Example 2 :This program suspends the count up operation and reads the clock counter registers while RTC counter 1 is running. (The seconds and minutes registers are stored at addresses 40H and 41H in RAM, respectively.)
LD LD SET LOOP: TEST JRS (DE). 0 T, LOOP ; Wait until TLOCK = "1". HL, RTCCR1 DE, RTCSR (HL). 0 ; Set THOLD to "1".
LD LD
A, (SECR) (40H), A ; Read the seconds register and store data at address 40H.
LD LD
A, (MINR) (41H), A ; Read the minutes register and store data at address 41H.
CLR
(HL). 0
; Clear THOLD to "0".
Example 3 :This program reads the clock counter registers while RTC counter 1 is running (without using RTCCR1). (The seconds and minutes registers are stored at addresses 40H and 41H in RAM, respectively.)
LD LOOP1: LD LD LD CMP JR W, (IX) HL, (IX+1) W, (IX) HL, (IX+1) NZ, LOOP1 ; Read the low-order 8 bits of RTC counter 1. ; Read the high-order 4 bits and middle-order 8 bits of RTC counter1. ; Read the low-order 8 bits of RTC counter 1. ; Read the high-order 4 bits and middle-order 8 bits of RTC counter1. ; If data could not be read correctly, return to LOOP1. IX, DIVRG1L
LD LD
A, (SECR) (40H), A ; Read the seconds register and store data at address 40H.
LD LD LOOP2: LD LD LD CMP JR
A, (MINR) (41H), A ; Read the minutes register and store data at address 41H.
W, (IX) DE, (IX+1) W, (IX) DE, (IX+1) NZ, LOOP2
; Read the low-order 8 bits of RTC counter 1. ; Read the high-order 4 bits and middle-order 8 bits of RTC counter 1. ; Read the low-order 8 bits of RTC counter 1. ; Read the high-order 4 bits and middle-order 8 bits of RTC counter 1. ; If data could not be read correctly, return to LOOP2.
CMP JR
DE, HL LT, LOOP1 ; If count up occurred, return to LOOP1.
Page 151
11. Real-Time Clock (RTC)
11.3 Function TMP86FM26UG
11.3.3 RTCOUT pin output
While the RTC is running, pulses equivalent to 1 Hz can be output from the RTCOUT pin.
Note 1: To use RTCOUT output, set RTCCR2 to "1" and then start the RTC (RTCCR1 = "1"). If these steps are not performed in this order, the pulse for the first one second cannot be precisely 1 Hz. Note 2: If the RTC is stopped while output is being made from the RTCOUT pin, the RTCOUT pin will be fixed at "H" level. Note 3: The falling edge of RTCOUT output is triggered by a match between the RTC counter 1 value and the RTC counter 1 compare register value. The rising edge of RTCOUT is triggered by a match between the RTC counter 1 value and the RTC counter 1 compare register value divided by two. Thus, if the value set in the RTC counter 1 compare register is not an even number, the pulse width cannot be precisely 0.5 seconds. (The "L" level width becomes one source clock shorter than the "H" level width.)
Table 11-3 Duty Cycles of the RTCOUT Output Waveform
RTCCR1 L width 000 H width L width 001 H width L width 010 H width L width 011 H width L width 100 H width L width 101 H width - 8.0 4.0 2.0 1.0 0.5 - - 4.0 8.0 2.0 4.0 1.0 2.0 0.5 1.0 0.25 0.5 F4240H - - 2.0 4.0 1.0 2.0 0.5 1.0 0.25 0.5 0.125 0.25 - - 1.0 2.0 0.5 1.0 0.25 0.5 0.125 0.25 0.0625 0.125 - - 0.5 1.0 0.25 0.5 0.125 0.25 0.0625 0.125 0.03125 0.0625 08000H 0.5 - - 0.5 - 0.25 - 0.125 - 0.0625 - 0.03125 RTREG1H/M/L 32.768 kHz 0.5 1 MHz - 2 MHz - 4 MHz - 8 MHz - 16 MHz -
0.5 0.5 seconds seconds RTCOUT pin
Figure 11-6 RTCOUT Output Waveform
Page 152
TMP86FM26UG
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
The TMP86FM26UG has a clocked-synchronous 8-bit serial interface. Serial interface has an 8-byte transmit and receive data buffer that can automatically and continuously transfer up to 64 bits of data. Serial interface is connected to outside peripherl devices via SO, SI, SCK port.
12.1 Configuration
SIO control / status register
SIOSR
SIOCR1
SIOCR2
CPU
Control circuit
Buffer control circuit Shift register Shift clock
Transmit and receive data buffer (8 bytes in DBR)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Serial data output 8-bit transfer 4-bit transfer
SI
Serial data input
INTSIO interrupt request
Serial clock
SCK
Serial clock I/O
Figure 12-1 Serial Interface
Page 153
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.2 Control TMP86FM26UG
12.2 Control
The serial interface is controlled by SIO control registers (SIOCR1/SIOCR2). The serial interface status can be determined by reading SIO status register (SIOSR). The transmit and receive data buffer is controlled by the SIOCR2. The data buffer is assigned to address 0F90H to 0F97H for SIO in the DBR area, and can continuously transfer up to 8 words (bytes or nibbles) at one time. When the specified number of words has been transferred, a buffer empty (in the transmit mode) or a buffer full (in the receive mode or transmit/receive mode) interrupt (INTSIO) is generated. When the internal clock is used as the serial clock in the 8-bit receive mode and the 8-bit transmit/receive mode, a fixed interval wait can be applied to the serial clock for each word transferred. Four different wait times can be selected with SIOCR2. SIO Control Register 1
SIOCR1 (0F98H) 7 SIOS 6 SIOINH 5 4 SIOM 3 2 1 SCK 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
SIOS
Indicate transfer start / stop
0: 1: 0: 1: 000: 010:
Stop Start Continuously transfer Abort transfer (Automatically cleared after abort) 8-bit transmit mode 4-bit transmit mode 8-bit transmit / receive mode 8-bit receive mode 4-bit receive mode Write only
SIOINH
Continue / abort transfer
SIOM
Transfer mode select
100: 101: 110:
Except the above: Reserved NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 SCK Serial clock select 010 011 100 101 110 111 fc/213 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 DV7CK = 1 fs/25 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 Reserved External clock ( Input from SCK pin ) SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/25 Write only
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz], fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Set SIOS to "0" and SIOINH to "1" when setting the transfer mode or serial clock. Note 3: SIOCR1 is write-only register, which cannot access any of in read-modify-write instruction such as bit operate, etc.
SIO Control Register 2
SIOCR2 (0F99H) 7 6 5 4 WAIT 3 2 1 BUF 0 (Initial value: ***0 0000)
Page 154
TMP86FM26UG
Always sets "00" except 8-bit transmit / receive mode. 00: WAIT Wait control 01: 10: 11: 000: 001: 010: BUF Number of transfer words (Buffer address in use) 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: Tf = TD(Non wait) Tf = 2TD(Wait) Tf = 4TD(Wait) Tf = 8TD (Wait) 1 word transfer 2 words transfer 3 words transfer 4 words transfer 5 words transfer 6 words transfer 7 words transfer 8 words transfer 0F90H 0F90H ~ 0F91H 0F90H ~ 0F92H 0F90H ~ 0F93H 0F90H ~ 0F94H 0F90H ~ 0F95H 0F90H ~ 0F96H 0F90H ~ 0F97H Write only
Note 1: The lower 4 bits of each buffer are used during 4-bit transfers. Zeros (0) are stored to the upper 4bits when receiving. Note 2: Transmitting starts at the lowest address. Received data are also stored starting from the lowest address to the highest address. ( The first buffer address transmitted is 0F90H ). Note 3: The value to be loaded to BUF is held after transfer is completed. Note 4: SIOCR2 must be set when the serial interface is stopped (SIOF = 0). Note 5: *: Don't care Note 6: SIOCR2 is write-only register, which cannot access any of in read-modify-write instruction such as bit operate, etc.
SIO Status Register
SIOSR (0F99H) 7 SIOF 6 SEF 5 4 3 2 1 0
SIOF SEF
Serial transfer operating status monitor Shift operating status monitor
0: 1: 0: 1:
Transfer terminated Transfer in process Shift operation terminated Shift operation in process
Read only
Note 1: Tf; Frame time, TD; Data transfer time Note 2: After SIOS is cleared to "0", SIOF is cleared to "0" at the termination of transfer or the setting of SIOINH to "1".
(output)
SCK output
TD Tf
Figure 12-2 Frame time (Tf) and Data transfer time (TD)
12.3 Serial clock
12.3.1 Clock source
Internal clock or external clock for the source clock is selected by SIOCR1.
Page 155
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.3 Serial clock TMP86FM26UG
12.3.1.1 Internal clock
Any of six frequencies can be selected. The serial clock is output to the outside on the SCK pin. The SCK pin goes high when transfer starts. When data writing (in the transmit mode) or reading (in the receive mode or the transmit/receive mode) cannot keep up with the serial clock rate, there is a wait function that automatically stops the serial clock and holds the next shift operation until the read/write processing is completed. Table 12-1 Serial Clock Rate
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 SCK 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Clock fc/213 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 External Baud Rate 1.91 Kbps 61.04 Kbps 122.07 Kbps 244.14 Kbps 488.28 Kbps 976.56 Kbps External Clock fs/25 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 External DV7CK = 1 Baud Rate 1024 bps 61.04 Kbps 122.07 Kbps 244.14 Kbps 488.28 Kbps 976.56 Kbps External SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode Clock fs/25 External Baud Rate 1024 bps External
Note: 1 Kbit = 1024 bit (fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Automatically wait function
SCK
pin (output)
SO
pin (output) Written transmit data a
a0
a1
a2
a3 b
b0
b1 c
b2
b3
c0
c1
Figure 12-3 Automatic Wait Function (at 4-bit transmit mode)
12.3.1.2 External clock
An external clock connected to the SCK pin is used as the serial clock. In this case, output latch of this port should be set to "1". To ensure shifting, a pulse width of at least 4 machine cycles is required. This pulse is needed for the shift operation to execute certainly. Actually, there is necessary processing time for interrupting, writing, and reading. The minimum pulse is determined by setting the mode and the program. Therfore, maximum transfer frequency will be 488.3K bit/sec (at fc=16MHz).
SCK
pin (Output)
tSCKL tSCKH
tcyc = 4/fc (In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) 4/fs (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes) tSCKL, tSCKH > 4tcyc
Figure 12-4 External clock pulse width
Page 156
TMP86FM26UG
12.3.2 Shift edge
The leading edge is used to transmit, and the trailing edge is used to receive.
12.3.2.1 Leading edge
Transmitted data are shifted on the leading edge of the serial clock (falling edge of the SCK pin input/ output).
12.3.2.2 Trailing edge
Received data are shifted on the trailing edge of the serial clock (rising edge of the SCK pin input/output).
SCK pin
SO pin
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Shift register
3210
*321
**32
***3
(a) Leading edge
SCK pin
SI pin
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Shift register
****
0***
10**
210*
3210
*; Don't care
(b) Trailing edge
Figure 12-5 Shift edge
12.4 Number of bits to transfer
Either 4-bit or 8-bit serial transfer can be selected. When 4-bit serial transfer is selected, only the lower 4 bits of the transmit/receive data buffer register are used. The upper 4 bits are cleared to "0" when receiving. The data is transferred in sequence starting at the least significant bit (LSB).
12.5 Number of words to transfer
Up to 8 words consisting of 4 bits of data (4-bit serial transfer) or 8 bits (8-bit serial transfer) of data can be transferred continuously. The number of words to be transferred can be selected by SIOCR2. An INTSIO interrupt is generated when the specified number of words has been transferred. If the number of words is to be changed during transfer, the serial interface must be stopped before making the change. The number of words can be changed during automatic-wait operation of an internal clock. In this case, the serial interface is not required to be stopped.
Page 157
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.6 Transfer Mode TMP86FM26UG
SCK pin
SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
INTSIO interrupt
(a) 1 word transmit
SCK pin
SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
b0
b1
b2
b3
c0
c1
c2
c3
INTSIO interrupt
(b) 3 words transmit
SCK pin
SI pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
b0
b1
b2
b3
c0
c1
c2
c3
INTSIO interrupt
(c) 3 words receive
Figure 12-6 Number of words to transfer (Example: 1word = 4bit)
12.6 Transfer Mode
SIOCR1 is used to select the transmit, receive, or transmit/receive mode.
12.6.1 4-bit and 8-bit transfer modes
In these modes, firstly set the SIO control register to the transmit mode, and then write first transmit data (number of transfer words to be transferred) to the data buffer registers (DBR). After the data are written, the transmission is started by setting SIOCR1 to "1". The data are then output sequentially to the SO pin in synchronous with the serial clock, starting with the least significant bit (LSB). As soon as the LSB has been output, the data are transferred from the data buffer register to the shift register. When the final data bit has been transferred and the data buffer register is empty, an INTSIO (Buffer empty) interrupt is generated to request the next transmitted data. When the internal clock is used, the serial clock will stop and an automatic-wait will be initiated if the next transmitted data are not loaded to the data buffer register by the time the number of data words specified with the SIOCR2 has been transmitted. Writing even one word of data cancels the automatic-wait; therefore, when transmitting two or more words, always write the next word before transmission of the previous word is completed.
Note:Automatic waits are also canceled by writing to a DBR not being used as a transmit data buffer register; therefore, during SIO do not use such DBR for other applications. For example, when 3 words are transmitted, do not use the DBR of the remained 5 words.
When an external clock is used, the data must be written to the data buffer register before shifting next data. Thus, the transfer speed is determined by the maximum delay time from the generation of the interrupt request to writing of the data to the data buffer register by the interrupt service program. The transmission is ended by clearing SIOCR1 to "0" or setting SIOCR1 to "1" in buffer empty interrupt service program. Page 158
TMP86FM26UG
SIOCR1 is cleared, the operation will end after all bits of words are transmitted. That the transmission has ended can be determined from the status of SIOSR because SIOSR is cleared to "0" when a transfer is completed. When SIOCR1 is set, the transmission is immediately ended and SIOSR is cleared to "0". When an external clock is used, it is also necessary to clear SIOCR1 to "0" before shifting the next data; If SIOCR1 is not cleared before shift out, dummy data will be transmitted and the operation will end. If it is necessary to change the number of words, SIOCR1 should be cleared to "0", then SIOCR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIOSR has been cleared to "0".
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (Output) SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO interrupt
DBR
a
Write Write (a) (b)
b
Figure 12-7 Transfer Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock)
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (Input) SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO interrupt
DBR
a
Write Write (a) (b)
b
Figure 12-8 Transfer Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, External clock)
Page 159
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.6 Transfer Mode TMP86FM26UG
SCK pin
SIOSR
SO pin
MSB of last word
tSODH = min 3.5/fc [s] ( In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) tSODH = min 3.5/fs [s] (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes)
Figure 12-9 Transmiiied Data Hold Time at End of Transfer 12.6.2 4-bit and 8-bit receive modes
After setting the control registers to the receive mode, set SIOCR1 to "1" to enable receiving. The data are then transferred to the shift register via the SI pin in synchronous with the serial clock. When one word of data has been received, it is transferred from the shift register to the data buffer register (DBR). When the number of words specified with the SIOCR2 has been received, an INTSIO (Buffer full) interrupt is generated to request that these data be read out. The data are then read from the data buffer registers by the interrupt service program. When the internal clock is used, and the previous data are not read from the data buffer register before the next data are received, the serial clock will stop and an automatic-wait will be initiated until the data are read. A wait will not be initiated if even one data word has been read.
Note:Waits are also canceled by reading a DBR not being used as a received data buffer register is read; therefore, during SIO do not use such DBR for other applications.
When an external clock is used, the shift operation is synchronized with the external clock; therefore, the previous data are read before the next data are transferred to the data buffer register. If the previous data have not been read, the next data will not be transferred to the data buffer register and the receiving of any more data will be canceled. When an external clock is used, the maximum transfer speed is determined by the delay between the time when the interrupt request is generated and when the data received have been read. The receiving is ended by clearing SIOCR1 to "0" or setting SIOCR1 to "1" in buffer full interrupt service program. When SIOCR1 is cleared, the current data are transferred to the buffer. After SIOCR1 cleared, the receiving is ended at the time that the final bit of the data has been received. That the receiving has ended can be determined from the status of SIOSR. SIOSR is cleared to "0" when the receiving is ended. After confirmed the receiving termination, the final receiving data is read. When SIOCR1 is set, the receiving is immediately ended and SIOSR is cleared to "0". (The received data is ignored, and it is not required to be read out.) If it is necessary to change the number of words in external clock operation, SIOCR1 should be cleared to "0" then SIOCR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIOSR has been cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in internal clock, during automatic-wait operation which occurs after completion of data receiving, SIOCR2 must be rewritten before the received data is read out.
Note:The buffer contents are lost when the transfer mode is switched. If it should become necessary to switch the transfer mode, end receiving by clearing SIOCR1 to "0", read the last data and then switch the transfer mode.
Page 160
TMP86FM26UG
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (Output) SI pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO Interrupt
DBR
a
Read out
b
Read out
Figure 12-10 Receive Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock) 12.6.3 8-bit transfer / receive mode
After setting the SIO control register to the 8-bit transmit/receive mode, write the data to be transmitted first to the data buffer registers (DBR). After that, enable the transmit/receive by setting SIOCR1 to "1". When transmitting, the data are output from the SO pin at leading edges of the serial clock. When receiving, the data are input to the SI pin at the trailing edges of the serial clock. When the all receive is enabled, 8-bit data are transferred from the shift register to the data buffer register. An INTSIO interrupt is generated when the number of data words specified with the SIOCR2 has been transferred. Usually, read the receive data from the buffer register in the interrupt service. The data buffer register is used for both transmitting and receiving; therefore, always write the data to be transmitted after reading the all received data. When the internal clock is used, a wait is initiated until the received data are read and the next transfer data are written. A wait will not be initiated if even one transfer data word has been written. When an external clock is used, the shift operation is synchronized with the external clock; therefore, it is necessary to read the received data and write the data to be transmitted next before starting the next shift operation. When an external clock is used, the transfer speed is determined by the maximum delay between generation of an interrupt request and the received data are read and the data to be transmitted next are written. The transmit/receive operation is ended by clearing SIOCR1 to "0" or setting SIOCR1 to "1" in INTSIO interrupt service program. When SIOCR1 is cleared, the current data are transferred to the buffer. After SIOCR1 cleared, the transmitting/receiving is ended at the time that the final bit of the data has been transmitted. That the transmitting/receiving has ended can be determined from the status of SIOSR. SIOSR is cleared to "0" when the transmitting/receiving is ended. When SIOCR1 is set, the transmit/receive operation is immediately ended and SIOSR is cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in external clock operation, SIOCR1 should be cleared to "0", then SIOCR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIOSR has been cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in internal clock, during automatic-wait operation which occurs after completion of transmit/receive operation, SIOCR2 must be rewritten before reading and writing of the receive/transmit data.
Page 161
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.6 Transfer Mode TMP86FM26UG
Note:The buffer contents are lost when the transfer mode is switched. If it should become necessary to switch the transfer mode, end receiving by clearing SIOCR1 to "0", read the last data and then switch the transfer mode.
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (output) SO pin
a0 c0
a1 c1
a2 c2
a3 c3
a4 c4
a5 c5
a6 c6
a7 c7
b0 d0
b1 d1
b2 d2
b3 d3
b4 d4
b5 d5
b6 d6
b7 d7
SI pin
INTSIO interrupt
DBR
a
Write (a) Read out (c)
c
b
Write (b)
d
Read out (d)
Figure 12-11 Transfer / Receive Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock)
SCK pin
SIOSR
SO pin
Bit 6
Bit 7 of last word
tSODH = min 4/fc [s] ( In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) tSODH = min 4/fs [s] (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes)
Figure 12-12 Transmitted Data Hold Time at End of Transfer / Receive
Page 162
TMP86FM26UG
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART0 )
13.1 Configuration
UART control register 1
UART0CR1
Transmit data buffer
TD0BUF
Receive data buffer
RD0BUF
3
2
Receive control circuit
2
Transmit control circuit Shift register
Shift register
Parity bit Stop bit
Noise rejection circuit
RXD0
INTTXD0
INTRXD0
TXD0
Transmit/receive clock
Y M P X S 2 Y Counter
UART0SR
S fc/13 fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416
INTTC5
A B C
fc/2 fc/27 8 fc/2
6
fc/96
A B C D E F G H
4 2
UART0CR2
UART status register Baud rate generator
UART control register 2 MPX: Multiplexer
Figure 13-1 UART0 (Asynchronous Serial Interface)
Page 163
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART0 )
13.2 Control TMP86FM26UG
13.2 Control
UART0 is controlled by the UART0 Control Registers (UART0CR1, UART0CR2). The operating status can be monitored using the UART status register (UART0SR).
UART0 Control Register1
UART0CR1 (0025H) 7 TXE 6 RXE 5 STBT 4 EVEN 3 PE 2 1 BRG 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TXE RXE STBT EVEN PE
Transfer operation Receive operation Transmit stop bit length Even-numbered parity Parity addition
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
Disable Enable Disable Enable 1 bit 2 bits Odd-numbered parity Even-numbered parity No parity Parity fc/13 [Hz] fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416 TC5 ( Input INTTC5) fc/96 Write only
BRG
Transmit clock select
Note 1: When operations are disabled by setting TXE and RXE bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data transmit or receive complete. When the transmit data is stored in the transmit data buffer, the data are not transmitted. Even if data transmit is enabled, until new data are written to the transmit data buffer, the current data are not transmitted. Note 2: The transmit clock and the parity are common to transmit and receive. Note 3: UART0CR1 and UART0CR1 should be set to "0" before UART0CR1 is changed.
UART0 Control Register2
UART0CR2 (0026H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 RXDNC 1 0 STOPBR (Initial value: **** *000)
RXDNC
Selection of RXD input noise rejection time
00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1:
No noise rejection (Hysteresis input) Rejects pulses shorter than 31/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 63/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 127/fc [s] as noise 1 bit 2 bits
Write only
STOPBR
Receive stop bit length
Note: When UART0CR2 = "01", pulses longer than 96/fc [s] are always regarded as signals; when UART0CR2 = "10", longer than 192/fc [s]; and when UART0CR2 = "11", longer than 384/fc [s].
Page 164
TMP86FM26UG
UART0 Status Register
UART0SR (0025H) 7 PERR 6 FERR 5 OERR 4 RBFL 3 TEND 2 TBEP 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 11**)
PERR FERR OERR RBFL TEND TBEP
Parity error flag Framing error flag Overrun error flag Receive data buffer full flag Transmit end flag Transmit data buffer empty flag
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1:
No parity error Parity error No framing error Framing error No overrun error Overrun error Receive data buffer empty Receive data buffer full On transmitting Transmit end Transmit data buffer full (Transmit data writing is finished) Transmit data buffer empty
Read only
Note: When an INTTXD is generated, TBEP flag is set to "1" automatically.
UART0 Receive Data Buffer
RD0BUF (0F9BH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
UART0 Transmit Data Buffer
TD0BUF (0F9BH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Write only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Page 165
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART0 )
13.3 Transfer Data Format TMP86FM26UG
13.3 Transfer Data Format
In UART0, an one-bit start bit (Low level), stop bit (Bit length selectable at high level, by UART0CR1), and parity (Select parity in UART0CR1; even- or odd-numbered parity by UART0CR1) are added to the transfer data. The transfer data formats are shown as follows.
PE
STBT
1
Start
2
Bit 0
3
Bit 1
Frame Length 8
Bit 6
9
Bit 7
10
Stop 1
11
12
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Stop 1
Stop 2
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Stop 2
Figure 13-2 Transfer Data Format
Without parity / 1 STOP bit
With parity / 1 STOP bit
Without parity / 2 STOP bit
With parity / 2 STOP bit
Figure 13-3 Caution on Changing Transfer Data Format
Note: In order to switch the transfer data format, perform transmit operations in the above Figure 13-3 sequence except for the initial setting.
Page 166
TMP86FM26UG
13.4 Transfer Rate
The baud rate of UART0 is set of UART0CR1. The example of the baud rate are shown as follows. Table 13-1 Transfer Rate (Example)
Source Clock BRG 16 MHz 000 001 010 011 100 101 76800 [baud] 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 8 MHz 38400 [baud] 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 4 MHz 19200 [baud] 9600 4800 2400 1200 600
When TC5 is used as the UART0 transfer rate (when UART0CR1 = "110"), the transfer clock and transfer rate are determined as follows: Transfer clock [Hz] = TC5 source clock [Hz] / TTREG5 setting value Transfer Rate [baud] = Transfer clock [Hz] / 16
13.5 Data Sampling Method
The UART0 receiver keeps sampling input using the clock selected by UART0CR1 until a start bit is detected in RXD0 pin input. RT clock starts detecting "L" level of the RXD0 pin. Once a start bit is detected, the start bit, data bits, stop bit(s), and parity bit are sampled at three times of RT7, RT8, and RT9 during one receiver clock interval (RT clock). (RT0 is the position where the bit supposedly starts.) Bit is determined according to majority rule (The data are the same twice or more out of three samplings).
RXD0 pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (a) Without noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
RXD0 pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (b) With noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
Figure 13-4 Data Sampling Method
Page 167
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART0 )
13.6 STOP Bit Length TMP86FM26UG
13.6 STOP Bit Length
Select a transmit stop bit length (1 bit or 2 bits) by UART0CR1.
13.7 Parity
Set parity / no parity by UART0CR1 and set parity type (Odd- or Even-numbered) by UART0CR1.
13.8 Transmit/Receive Operation
13.8.1 Data Transmit Operation
Set UART0CR1 to "1". Read UART0SR to check UART0SR = "1", then write data in TD0BUF (Transmit data buffer). Writing data in TD0BUF zero-clears UART0SR, transfers the data to the transmit shift register and the data are sequentially output from the TXD0 pin. The data output include a one-bit start bit, stop bits whose number is specified in UART0CR1 and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. Select the data transfer baud rate using UART0CR1. When data transmit starts, transmit buffer empty flag UART0SR is set to "1" and an INTTXD0 interrupt is generated. While UART0CR1 = "0" and from when "1" is written to UART0CR1 to when send data are written to TD0BUF, the TXD0 pin is fixed at high level. When transmitting data, first read UART0SR, then write data in TD0BUF. Otherwise, UART0SR is not zero-cleared and transmit does not start.
13.8.2 Data Receive Operation
Set UART0CR1 to "1". When data are received via the RXD0 pin, the receive data are transferred to RD0BUF (Receive data buffer). At this time, the data transmitted includes a start bit and stop bit(s) and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. When stop bit(s) are received, data only are extracted and transferred to RD0BUF (Receive data buffer). Then the receive buffer full flag UART0SR is set and an INTRXD0 interrupt is generated. Select the data transfer baud rate using UART0CR1. If an overrun error (OERR) occurs when data are received, the data are not transferred to RD0BUF (Receive data buffer) but discarded; data in the RD0BUF are not affected.
Note:When a receive operation is disabled by setting UART0CR1 bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data receive is completed. However, if a framing error occurs in data receive, the receive-disabling setting may not become valid. If a framing error occurs, be sure to perform a re-receive operation.
Page 168
TMP86FM26UG
13.9 Status Flag
13.9.1 Parity Error
When parity determined using the receive data bits differs from the received parity bit, the parity error flag UART0SR is set to "1". The UART0SR is cleared to "0" when the RD0BUF is read after reading the UART0SR.
RXD0 pin
Parity
Stop
Shift register
UART0SR
xxxx0**
pxxxx0*
1pxxxx0
After reading UART0SR then RD0BUF clears PERR.
INTRXD0 interrupt
Figure 13-5 Generation of Parity Error 13.9.2 Framing Error
When "0" is sampled as the stop bit in the receive data, framing error flag UART0SR is set to "1". The UART0SR is cleared to "0" when the RD0BUF is read after reading the UART0SR.
RXD0 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
UART0SR
xxx0**
xxxx0*
0xxxx0
After reading UART0SR then RD0BUF clears FERR.
INTRXD0 interrupt
Figure 13-6 Generation of Framing Error 13.9.3 Overrun Error
When all bits in the next data are received while unread data are still in RD0BUF, overrun error flag UART0SR is set to "1". In this case, the receive data is discarded; data in RD0BUF are not affected. The UART0SR is cleared to "0" when the RD0BUF is read after reading the UART0SR.
Page 169
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART0 )
13.9 Status Flag TMP86FM26UG
UART0SR
RXD0 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RD0BUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
UART0SR
After reading UART0SR then RD0BUF clears OERR.
INTRXD0 interrupt
Figure 13-7 Generation of Overrun Error
Note:Receive operations are disabled until the overrun error flag UART0SR is cleared.
13.9.4 Receive Data Buffer Full
Loading the received data in RD0BUF sets receive data buffer full flag UART0SR to "1". The UART0SR is cleared to "0" when the RD0BUF is read after reading the UART0SR.
RXD0 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RD0BUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
xxxx
After reading UART0SR then RD0BUF clears RBFL.
UART0SR
INTRXD0 interrupt
Figure 13-8 Generation of Receive Data Buffer Full
Note:If the overrun error flag UART0SR is set during the period between reading the UART0SR and reading the RD0BUF, it cannot be cleared by only reading the RD0BUF. Therefore, after reading the RD0BUF, read the UART0SR again to check whether or not the overrun error flag which should have been cleared still remains set.
13.9.5 Transmit Data Buffer Empty
When no data is in the transmit buffer TD0BUF, that is, when data in TD0BUF are transferred to the transmit shift register and data transmit starts, transmit data buffer empty flag UART0SR is set to "1". The UART0SR is cleared to "0" when the TD0BUF is written after reading the UART0SR.
Page 170
TMP86FM26UG
Data write
TD0BUF
Data write
xxxx
yyyy
zzzz
Shift register
TXD0 pin
*****1
1xxxx0
*1xxxx Bit 0
****1x Final bit
*****1 Stop
1yyyy0
Start
UART0SR After reading UART0SR writing TD0BUF clears TBEP.
INTTXD0 interrupt
Figure 13-9 Generation of Transmit Data Buffer Empty 13.9.6 Transmit End Flag
When data are transmitted and no data is in TD0BUF (UART0SR = "1"), transmit end flag UART0SR is set to "1". The UART0SR is cleared to "0" when the data transmit is started after writing the TD0BUF.
Shift register
TXD0 pin
***1xx
****1x
*****1
1yyyy0
*1yyyy
Stop
Data write for TD0BUF
Start
Bit 0
UART0SR
UART0SR
INTTXD0 interrupt
Figure 13-10 Generation of Transmit End Flag and Transmit Data Buffer Empty
Page 171
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART0 )
13.9 Status Flag TMP86FM26UG
Page 172
TMP86FM26UG
14. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
14.1 Configuration
UART control register 1
UART1CR1
Transmit data buffer
TD1BUF
Receive data buffer
RD1BUF
3
2
Receive control circuit
2
Transmit control circuit Shift register
Shift register
Parity bit Stop bit
Noise rejection circuit
RXD1
INTTXD1
INTRXD1
TXD1
Transmit/receive clock
Y M P X S 2 Y Counter
UART1SR
S fc/13 fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416
INTTC5
A B C
fc/2 fc/27 8 fc/2
6
fc/96
A B C D E F G H
4 2
UART1CR2
UART status register Baud rate generator
UART control register 2 MPX: Multiplexer
Figure 14-1 UART1 (Asynchronous Serial Interface)
Page 173
14. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
14.2 Control TMP86FM26UG
14.2 Control
UART1 is controlled by the UART1 Control Registers (UART1CR1, UART1CR2). The operating status can be monitored using the UART status register (UART1SR).
UART1 Control Register1
UART1CR1 (000EH) 7 TXE 6 RXE 5 STBT 4 EVEN 3 PE 2 1 BRG 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TXE RXE STBT EVEN PE
Transfer operation Receive operation Transmit stop bit length Even-numbered parity Parity addition
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
Disable Enable Disable Enable 1 bit 2 bits Odd-numbered parity Even-numbered parity No parity Parity fc/13 [Hz] fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416 TC5 ( Input INTTC5) fc/96 Write only
BRG
Transmit clock select
Note 1: When operations are disabled by setting TXE and RXE bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data transmit or receive complete. When the transmit data is stored in the transmit data buffer, the data are not transmitted. Even if data transmit is enabled, until new data are written to the transmit data buffer, the current data are not transmitted. Note 2: The transmit clock and the parity are common to transmit and receive. Note 3: UART1CR1 and UART1CR1 should be set to "0" before UART1CR1 is changed.
UART1 Control Register2
UART1CR2 (000FH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 RXDNC 1 0 STOPBR (Initial value: **** *000)
RXDNC
Selection of RXD input noise rejection time
00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1:
No noise rejection (Hysteresis input) Rejects pulses shorter than 31/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 63/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 127/fc [s] as noise 1 bit 2 bits
Write only
STOPBR
Receive stop bit length
Note: When UART1CR2 = "01", pulses longer than 96/fc [s] are always regarded as signals; when UART1CR2 = "10", longer than 192/fc [s]; and when UART1CR2 = "11", longer than 384/fc [s].
Page 174
TMP86FM26UG
UART1 Status Register
UART1SR (000EH) 7 PERR 6 FERR 5 OERR 4 RBFL 3 TEND 2 TBEP 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 11**)
PERR FERR OERR RBFL TEND TBEP
Parity error flag Framing error flag Overrun error flag Receive data buffer full flag Transmit end flag Transmit data buffer empty flag
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1:
No parity error Parity error No framing error Framing error No overrun error Overrun error Receive data buffer empty Receive data buffer full On transmitting Transmit end Transmit data buffer full (Transmit data writing is finished) Transmit data buffer empty
Read only
Note: When an INTTXD is generated, TBEP flag is set to "1" automatically.
UART1 Receive Data Buffer
RD1BUF (0F9CH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
UART1 Transmit Data Buffer
TD1BUF (0F9CH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Write only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Page 175
14. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
14.3 Transfer Data Format TMP86FM26UG
14.3 Transfer Data Format
In UART1, an one-bit start bit (Low level), stop bit (Bit length selectable at high level, by UART1CR1), and parity (Select parity in UART1CR1; even- or odd-numbered parity by UART1CR1) are added to the transfer data. The transfer data formats are shown as follows.
PE
STBT
1
Start
2
Bit 0
3
Bit 1
Frame Length 8
Bit 6
9
Bit 7
10
Stop 1
11
12
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Stop 1
Stop 2
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Stop 2
Figure 14-2 Transfer Data Format
Without parity / 1 STOP bit
With parity / 1 STOP bit
Without parity / 2 STOP bit
With parity / 2 STOP bit
Figure 14-3 Caution on Changing Transfer Data Format
Note: In order to switch the transfer data format, perform transmit operations in the above Figure 14-3 sequence except for the initial setting.
Page 176
TMP86FM26UG
14.4 Transfer Rate
The baud rate of UART1 is set of UART1CR1. The example of the baud rate are shown as follows. Table 14-1 Transfer Rate (Example)
Source Clock BRG 16 MHz 000 001 010 011 100 101 76800 [baud] 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 8 MHz 38400 [baud] 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 4 MHz 19200 [baud] 9600 4800 2400 1200 600
When TC5 is used as the UART1 transfer rate (when UART1CR1 = "110"), the transfer clock and transfer rate are determined as follows: Transfer clock [Hz] = TC5 source clock [Hz] / TTREG5 setting value Transfer Rate [baud] = Transfer clock [Hz] / 16
14.5 Data Sampling Method
The UART1 receiver keeps sampling input using the clock selected by UART1CR1 until a start bit is detected in RXD1 pin input. RT clock starts detecting "L" level of the RXD1 pin. Once a start bit is detected, the start bit, data bits, stop bit(s), and parity bit are sampled at three times of RT7, RT8, and RT9 during one receiver clock interval (RT clock). (RT0 is the position where the bit supposedly starts.) Bit is determined according to majority rule (The data are the same twice or more out of three samplings).
RXD1 pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (a) Without noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
RXD1 pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (b) With noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
Figure 14-4 Data Sampling Method
Page 177
14. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
14.6 STOP Bit Length TMP86FM26UG
14.6 STOP Bit Length
Select a transmit stop bit length (1 bit or 2 bits) by UART1CR1.
14.7 Parity
Set parity / no parity by UART1CR1 and set parity type (Odd- or Even-numbered) by UART1CR1.
14.8 Transmit/Receive Operation
14.8.1 Data Transmit Operation
Set UART1CR1 to "1". Read UART1SR to check UART1SR = "1", then write data in TD1BUF (Transmit data buffer). Writing data in TD1BUF zero-clears UART1SR, transfers the data to the transmit shift register and the data are sequentially output from the TXD1 pin. The data output include a one-bit start bit, stop bits whose number is specified in UART1CR1 and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. Select the data transfer baud rate using UART1CR1. When data transmit starts, transmit buffer empty flag UART1SR is set to "1" and an INTTXD1 interrupt is generated. While UART1CR1 = "0" and from when "1" is written to UART1CR1 to when send data are written to TD1BUF, the TXD1 pin is fixed at high level. When transmitting data, first read UART1SR, then write data in TD1BUF. Otherwise, UART1SR is not zero-cleared and transmit does not start.
14.8.2 Data Receive Operation
Set UART1CR1 to "1". When data are received via the RXD1 pin, the receive data are transferred to RD1BUF (Receive data buffer). At this time, the data transmitted includes a start bit and stop bit(s) and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. When stop bit(s) are received, data only are extracted and transferred to RD1BUF (Receive data buffer). Then the receive buffer full flag UART1SR is set and an INTRXD1 interrupt is generated. Select the data transfer baud rate using UART1CR1. If an overrun error (OERR) occurs when data are received, the data are not transferred to RD1BUF (Receive data buffer) but discarded; data in the RD1BUF are not affected.
Note:When a receive operation is disabled by setting UART1CR1 bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data receive is completed. However, if a framing error occurs in data receive, the receive-disabling setting may not become valid. If a framing error occurs, be sure to perform a re-receive operation.
Page 178
TMP86FM26UG
14.9 Status Flag
14.9.1 Parity Error
When parity determined using the receive data bits differs from the received parity bit, the parity error flag UART1SR is set to "1". The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the RD1BUF is read after reading the UART1SR.
RXD1 pin
Parity
Stop
Shift register
UART1SR
xxxx0**
pxxxx0*
1pxxxx0
After reading UART1SR then RD1BUF clears PERR.
INTRXD1 interrupt
Figure 14-5 Generation of Parity Error 14.9.2 Framing Error
When "0" is sampled as the stop bit in the receive data, framing error flag UART1SR is set to "1". The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the RD1BUF is read after reading the UART1SR.
RXD1 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
UART1SR
xxx0**
xxxx0*
0xxxx0
After reading UART1SR then RD1BUF clears FERR.
INTRXD1 interrupt
Figure 14-6 Generation of Framing Error 14.9.3 Overrun Error
When all bits in the next data are received while unread data are still in RD1BUF, overrun error flag UART1SR is set to "1". In this case, the receive data is discarded; data in RD1BUF are not affected. The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the RD1BUF is read after reading the UART1SR.
Page 179
14. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
14.9 Status Flag TMP86FM26UG
UART1SR
RXD1 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RD1BUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
UART1SR
After reading UART1SR then RD1BUF clears OERR.
INTRXD1 interrupt
Figure 14-7 Generation of Overrun Error
Note:Receive operations are disabled until the overrun error flag UART1SR is cleared.
14.9.4 Receive Data Buffer Full
Loading the received data in RD1BUF sets receive data buffer full flag UART1SR to "1". The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the RD1BUF is read after reading the UART1SR.
RXD1 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RD1BUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
xxxx
After reading UART1SR then RD1BUF clears RBFL.
UART1SR
INTRXD1 interrupt
Figure 14-8 Generation of Receive Data Buffer Full
Note:If the overrun error flag UART1SR is set during the period between reading the UART1SR and reading the RD1BUF, it cannot be cleared by only reading the RD1BUF. Therefore, after reading the RD1BUF, read the UART1SR again to check whether or not the overrun error flag which should have been cleared still remains set.
14.9.5 Transmit Data Buffer Empty
When no data is in the transmit buffer TD1BUF, that is, when data in TD1BUF are transferred to the transmit shift register and data transmit starts, transmit data buffer empty flag UART1SR is set to "1". The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the TD1BUF is written after reading the UART1SR.
Page 180
TMP86FM26UG
Data write
TD1BUF
Data write
xxxx
yyyy
zzzz
Shift register
TXD1 pin
*****1
1xxxx0
*1xxxx Bit 0
****1x Final bit
*****1 Stop
1yyyy0
Start
UART1SR After reading UART1SR writing TD1BUF clears TBEP.
INTTXD1 interrupt
Figure 14-9 Generation of Transmit Data Buffer Empty 14.9.6 Transmit End Flag
When data are transmitted and no data is in TD1BUF (UART1SR = "1"), transmit end flag UART1SR is set to "1". The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the data transmit is started after writing the TD1BUF.
Shift register
TXD1 pin
***1xx
****1x
*****1
1yyyy0
*1yyyy
Stop
Data write for TD1BUF
Start
Bit 0
UART1SR
UART1SR
INTTXD1 interrupt
Figure 14-10 Generation of Transmit End Flag and Transmit Data Buffer Empty
Page 181
14. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
14.9 Status Flag TMP86FM26UG
Page 182
TMP86FM26UG
15. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
In the TMP86FM26UG, the STOP mode is released by not only P20(INT5/STOP) pin but also four (STOP2 to STOP5) pins. When the STOP mode is released by STOP2 to STOP5 pins, the STOP pin needs to be used. In details, refer to the following section " 15.2 Control ".
15.1 Configuration
INT5 STOP mode release signal (1: Release) STOP
STOP2 STOP3 STOP4 STOP5
STOPCR (0F9AH)
Figure 15-1 Key-on Wakeup Circuit
15.2 Control
STOP2 to STOP5 pins can controlled by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR). It can be configured as enable/disable in 1-bit unit. When those pins are used for STOP mode release, configure corresponding I/O pins to input mode by I/O port register beforehand. Key-on Wakeup Control Register
STOPCR (0F9AH) 7 STOP5 6 STOP4 5 STOP3 4 STOP2 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 ****)
STOP5 STOP4 STOP3 STOP2
0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable
STOP5 STOP4 STOP3 STOP2
STOP mode released by STOP5 STOP mode released by STOP4 STOP mode released by STOP3 STOP mode released by STOP2
Write only Write only Write only Write only
15.3 Function
Stop mode can be entered by setting up the System Control Register (SYSCR1), and can be exited by detecting the "L" level on STOP2 to STOP5 pins, which are enabled by STOPCR, for releasing STOP mode (Note1).
Page 183
15. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
15.3 Function TMP86FM26UG
Also, each level of the STOP2 to STOP5 pins can be confirmed by reading corresponding I/O port data register, check all STOP2 to STOP5 pins "H" that is enabled by STOPCR before the STOP mode is started (Note2).
Note 1: When the STOP mode released by the edge release mode (SYSCR1 = "0"), inhibit input from STOP2 to STOP5 pins by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR) or must be set "H" level into STOP2 to STOP5 pins that are available input during STOP mode. Note 2: When the STOP pin input is high or STOP2 to STOP5 pins input which is enabled by STOPCR is low, executing an instruction which starts STOP mode will not place in STOP mode but instead will immediately start the release sequence (Warm up). Note 3: STOP pin doesn't have the control register such as STOPCR, so when STOP mode is released by STOP2 to STOP5 pins, STOP pin also should be used as STOP mode release function. Note 4: When the STOP mode is released by STOP2 to STOP5 pins, the level of STOP pin should hold "L" level (Figure 15-2).
a) STOP
b) In case of STOP2 to STOP5
STOP pin STOP mode Release STOP mode
STOP pin "L"
STOP2 pin
STOP mode
Release STOP mode
Figure 15-2 Priority of STOP pin and STOP2 to STOP5 pins
Table 15-1 Release level (edge) of STOP mode
Release level (edge) Pin name SYSCR1="1" (Note2) "H" level "L" level "L" level "L" level "L" level SYSCR1="0" Rising edge Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1)
STOP
STOP2 STOP3 STOP4 STOP5
Page 184
TMP86FM26UG
16. LCD Driver
The TMP86FM26UG has a driver and control circuit to directly drive the liquid crystal device (LCD). The pins to be connected to LCD are as follows: 1. Segment output port 32 pins (SEG31 to SEG0) 2. Common output port4 pins (COM3 to COM0) In addition, C0, C1, V1, V2, V3 pin are provided for the LCD driver's booster circuit. The devices that can be directly driven is selectable from LCD of the following drive methods: 1. 1/4 Duty (1/3 Bias) LCD 2. 1/3 Duty (1/3 Bias) LCD 3. 1/2 Duty (1/2 Bias) LCD 4. Static LCD Max 128 Segments(8 segments x 16 digits) Max 96 Segments(8 segments x 12 digits) Max 64 Segments(8 segments x 8 digits) Max 32 Segments(8 segments x 4 digits)
16.1 Configuration
LCDCR 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SLF DBR fc/217, fs/29 fc/216, fs/28 fc/215 fc/213 display data area 0 EDSP BRES VFSEL DUTY
Duty control fc/213, fs/25 fc/211, fs/23 fc/210, fs/22 fc/29 Constant voltage booster circuit Blanking control
Timing control
Display data select control
Display data buffer register
Common driver
Segment driver
C0 C1
V1 V2 V3
COM0
to
COM3
SEG0
SEG31
Figure 16-1 LCD Driver
Note: The LCD driver incorporates a dedicated divider circuit. Therefore, the break function of a debugger (development tool) will not stop LCD driver output.
Page 185
16. LCD Driver
16.2 Control TMP86FM26UG
16.2 Control
The LCD driver is controlled using the LCD control register (LCDCR). The LCD driver's display is enabled using the EDSP. LCD Driver Control Register
LCDCR (0028H) 7 EDSP 6 BRES 5 VFSEL 4 3 DUTY 2 1 SLF 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
EDSP BRES
LCD Display Control Booster circuit control
0: Blanking 1: Enables LCD display (Blanking is released) 0: Disable (use divider resistance) 1: Enable NORMAL1/2, IDLE/1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 00 fc/213 fc/211 fc/210 fc/29 DV7CK = 1 fs/25 fs/23 fs/22 fc/29 SLOW1/2, SLEEP0/1/2 mode fs/25 fs/23 fs/22 - R/W
VFSEL
Selection of boost frequency
01 10 11
DUTY
Selection of driving methods
00: 1/4 Duty (1/3 Bias) 01: 1/3 Duty (1/3 Bias) 10: 1/2 Duty (1/2 Bias) 11: Static NORMAL1/2, IDLE/1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/29 fs/28 fc/215 fc/213 SLOW1/2, SLEEP0/1/2 mode fs/29 fs/28 - -
SLF
Selection of LCD frame frequency
00 01 10 11
fc/217 fc/216 fc/215 fc/213
Note 1: When (Booster circuit control) is set to "0", VDD V3 V2 V1 VSS should be satisfied. When is set to "1", 3.6 [V] V3 VDD should be satisfied. If these conditions are not satisfied, it not only affects the quality of LCD display but also may damage the device due to over voltage of the port. Note 2: When used as the booster circuit, bias should be composed to 1/3. Therefore, do not set LCDCR to "10" or "11" when the booster circuit is enable. Note 3: Do not set SLF to "10" or "11" in SLOW1/2 modes. Note 4: Do not set VFSEL to "11" SLOW1/2 modes.
Page 186
TMP86FM26UG
16.2.1 LCD driving methods
As for LCD driving method, 4 types can be selected by LCDCR. The driving method is initialized in the initial program according to the LCD used.
VLCD3 1/fF VLCD3 1/fF
0
0
-VLCD3
Data "1" (a) 1/4 Duty (1/3 Bias)
Data "0"
-VLCD3
Data "1"
Data "0"
(b) 1/3 Duty (1/3 Bias) VLCD3 1/fF
VLCD3
1/fF
0 -VLCD3 Data "1" Data "0"
0
-VLCD3 (c) 1/2 Duty (1/2 Bias)
Data "1" (d) Static
Data "0"
Note 1: fF: Frame frequency Note 2: VLCD3: LCD drive voltage
Figure 16-2 LCD Drive Waveform (COM-SEG pins)
Page 187
16. LCD Driver
16.2 Control TMP86FM26UG
16.2.2 Frame frequency
Frame frequency (fF) is set according to driving method and base frequency as shown in the following Table 16-1. The base frequency is selected by LCDCR according to the frequency fc and fs of the basic clock to be used. Table 16-1 Setting of LCD Frame Frequency
(a) At the single clock mode. At the dual clock mode (DV7CK = 0). Frame frequency [Hz] SLF Base frequency [Hz] 1/4 Duty 1/3 Duty 1/2 Duty Static
fc ------17 2
00 (fc = 16 MHz) (fc = 8 MHz)
fc ------17 2
122 61
4 fc -- * ------3 2 17
163 81
4 fc -- * ------2 2 17
244 122
fc ------17 2
122 61
fc ------16 2
01 (fc = 8 MHz) (fc = 4 MHz)
fc ------16 2
122 61
4 fc -- * ------3 2 16
163 81
4 fc -- * ------2 2 16
244 122
fc ------16 2
122 61
fc ------15 2
10 (fc = 4 MHz) (fc = 2 MHz)
fc ------15 2
122 61
4 fc -- * ------3 2 15
163 81
4 fc -- * ------2 2 15
244 122
fc ------15 2
122 61
11
fc ------13 2
(fc = 1 MHz)
fc ------13 2
122
4 fc -- * ------3 2 13
163
4 fc -- * ------2 2 13
244
fc ------13 2
122
Note: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz]
Table 16-2
(b) At the dual clock mode (DV7CK = 1 or SYSCK = 1) Frame frequency [Hz] SLF Base frequency [Hz] 1/4 Duty 1/3 Duty 1/2 Duty Static
00
fs ----9 2
(fs = 32.768 kHz)
fs ----9 2
64
4 fs -- * ----3 29
85
4 fs -- * ----2 29
128
fs ----9 2
64
01
fs ----8 2
(fs = 32.768 kHz)
fs ----8 2
128
4 fs -- * ----3 28
171
4 fs -- * ----2 28
256
fs ----8 2
128
Note: fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz]
Page 188
TMP86FM26UG
16.2.3 Driving method for LCD driver
In the TMP86FM26UG, LCD driving voltages can be generated using either an internal booster circuit or an external resistor divider. This selection is made in LCDCR.
16.2.3.1 When using the booster circuit (LCDCR="1")
When the reference voltage is connected to the V1 pin, the booster circuit boosts the reference voltage twofold (V2) or threefold (V3) to generate the output voltages for segment/common signals. When the reference voltage is connected to the V2 pin, it is reduced to 1/2 (V1) or boosted to 3/2 (V3). When the reference voltage is connected to the V3 pin, it is reduced to 1/3 (V1) or 2/3 (V2). LCDCR is used to select the reference frequency in the booster circuit. The faster the boosting frequency, the higher the segment/common drive capability, but power consumption is increased. Conversely, the slower the boosting frequency, the lower the segment/common drive capability, but power consumption is reduced. If the drive capability is insufficient, the LCD may not be displayed clearly. Therefore, select an optimum boosting frequency for the LCD panel to be used. Table 16-3 shows the V3 pin current capacity and boosting frequency.
Note: When used as the booster circuit, bias should be composed to 1/3. Therefore, do not set LCDCR to "10" or "11" when the booster circuit is enable (LCDCR="1").
Keep the following condition. V3 V1 = 1/3 x V3 C = 0.1 to 0.47 F
VDD V3 V2 V1 C C
Reference voltage C1 C0 VSS a) Reference pin = V1 VDD V3 V2 V1 C C C Reference voltage C1 C0 VSS C C
Keep the following condition. V3 V2 = 2/3 x V3 C = 0.1 to 0.47 F
b) Reference pin = V2
Page 189
16. LCD Driver
16.2 Control TMP86FM26UG
Keep the following condition. V3 C = 0.1 to 0.47 F
VDD V3 V2 V1 C C C Reference voltage
C1 C0 VSS
C
c) Reference pin = V3
Keep the following condition. V3 = C = 0.1 to 0.47 F
VDD V3 V2 V1 C C C
C1 C0 VSS
C
d) Reference pin = V3
Note 1: When the TMP86FM26UG uses the booster circuit to drive the LCD, the power supply and capacitor for the booster circuit should be connected as shown above. Note 2: When the reference voltage is connected to a pin other than V1, add a capacitor between V1 and GND.
Figure 16-3 Connection Examples When Using the Booster Circuit (LCDCR = "1")
Table 16-3 V3 Pin Current Capacity and Boosting Frequency (typ.)
VFSEL 00 01 10 11 Boosting frequency fc/213 or fs/25 fc/211 or fs/23 fc/210 or fs/22 fc/29 fc = 16 MHz -37 mV/ A -19 mV/ A -17 mV/ A -16 mV/ A fc = 8 MHz -80 mV/ A -24 mV/ A -19 mV/ A -17 mV/ A fc = 4 MHz -138 mV/ A -37 mV/ A -24 mV/ A -19 mV/ A fc = 32.768 MHz -76 mV/ A -23 mV/ A -18 mV/ A -
Note 1: The current capacity is the amount of voltage that falls per 1A. Note 2: The boosting frequency should be selected depending on your LCD panel. Note 3: For the reference pin V1 or V2, a current capacity ten times larger than the above is recommended to ensure stable operation. For example, when the boosting frequency is fc/29 (at fc = 8 MHz), -1.7 mV/ A or more is recommended for the current capacity of the reference pin V1.
16.2.3.2 When using an external resistor divider (LCDCR="0")
When an external resistor divider is used, the voltage of an external power supply is divided and input on V1, V2, and V3 to generate the output voltages for segment/common signals.
Page 190
TMP86FM26UG
The smaller the external resistor value, the higher the segment/common drive capability, but power consumption is increased. Conversely, the larger the external resistor value, the lower the segment/common drive capability, but power consumption is reduced. If the drive capability is insufficient, the LCD may not be displayed clearly. Therefore, select an optimum resistor value for the LCD panel to be used.
Adjustment of contrast VDD V3 R1 V2 C0 C1 V1 R3 VSS 1/3 Bias (R1 = R2 = R3) Keep the following conditon. VDD V3 V2 V1 VSS Open Open R2 VDD
Adjustment of contrast V3 R1 V2 C0 C1 V1 R2 VSS Static Open Open VDD
Adjustment of contrast V3 V2 C0 C1 V1 R1 Open Open
1/2 Bias (R1 = R2)
VSS
Figure 16-4 Connection Examples When Using an External Resistor Divider (LCDCR = "0")
16.3 LCD Display Operation
16.3.1 Display data setting
Display data is stored to the display data area (assigned to address 0F80H to 0F8FH, 16bytes) in the DBR. The display data which are stored in the display data area is automatically read out and sent to the LCD driver by the hardware. The LCD driver generates the segment signal and common signal according to the display data and driving method. Therefore, display patterns can be changed by only over writing the contents of display data area by the program. Table 16-5 shows the correspondence between the display data area and SEG/ COM pins. LCD light when display data is "1" and turn off when "0". According to the driving method of LCD, the number of pixels which can be driven becomes different, and the number of bits in the display data area which is used to store display data also becomes different. Therefore, the bits which are not used to store display data as well as the data buffer which corresponds to the addresses not connected to LCD can be used to store general user process data (see Table 16-4).
Note:The display data memory contents become unstable when the power supply is turned on; therefore, the display data memory should be initialized by an initiation routine.
Table 16-4 Driving Method and Bit for Display Data
Driving methods 1/4 Duty 1/3 Duty 1/2 Duty Static Bit 7/3 COM3 - - - Bit 6/2 COM2 COM2 - - Bit 5/1 COM1 COM1 COM1 - Bit 4/0 COM0 COM0 COM0 COM0
Page 191
16. LCD Driver
16.3 LCD Display Operation TMP86FM26UG
Note: -: This bit is not used for display data
Table 16-5 LCD Display Data Area (DBR)
Address 0F80H 0F81H 0F82H 0F83H 0F84H 0F85H 0F86H 0F87H 0F88H 0F89H 0F8AH 0F8BH 0F8CH 0F8DH 0F8EH 0F8FH COM3 Bit 7 Bit 6 SEG1 SEG3 SEG5 SEG7 SEG9 SEG11 SEG13 SEG15 SEG17 SEG19 SEG21 SEG23 SEG25 SEG27 SEG29 SEG31 COM2 COM1 COM0 COM3 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 SEG0 SEG2 SEG4 SEG6 SEG8 SEG10 SEG12 SEG14 SEG16 SEG18 SEG20 SEG22 SEG24 SEG26 SEG28 SEG30 COM2 COM1 COM0 Bit 1 Bit 0
16.3.2 Blanking
Blanking is enabled when EDSP is cleared to "0". Blanking turns off LCD through outputting a GND level to SEG/COM pin. When in STOP mode, EDSP is cleared to "0" and automatically blanked. To redisplay ICD after exiting STOP mode, it is necessary to set EDSP back to "1".
Note:During reset, the LCD segment outputs and LCD common outputs are fixed "0" level. But the multiplex terminal of input/output port and LCD segment output becomes high impedance. Therefore, when the reset input is long remarkably, ghost problem may appear in LCD display.
Page 192
TMP86FM26UG
16.4 Control Method of LCD Driver
16.4.1 Initial setting
Figure 16-5 shows the flowchart of initialization. Example : To operate a 1/4 duty LCD of 32 segments x 4 com-mons at frame frequency fc/216 [Hz], and booster frequency fc/213 [Hz]
LD LD : : LD (LCDCR), 01000001B (P*LCR), 0FFH : : (LCDCR), 11000001B ; Sets the initial value of display data. ; Display enable ; Sets LCD driving method and frame frequency. Boost frequency ; Sets segment output control register. (*; Port No.)
Sets LCD driving method (DUTY). Sets boost frequency (VFSEL). Sets frame frequency (SLF). Enables booster circuit (BRES) Sets segment output control registers (P*LCR (*; Port No.)) Initialization of display data area.
Display enable (EDSP) (Releases from blanking.)
Figure 16-5 Initial Setting of LCD Driver 16.4.2 Store of display data
Generally, display data are prepared as fixed data in program memory (ROM) and stored in display data area by load command.
Page 193
16. LCD Driver
16.4 Control Method of LCD Driver TMP86FM26UG
Example :To display using 1/4 duty LCD a numerical value which corresponds to the LCD data stored in data memory at address 80H (when pins COM and SEG are connected to LCD as in Figure 16-6), display data become as shown in Table 16-6.
LD ADD LD LD LD RET TABLE: DB 11011111B, 00000110B, 11100011B, 10100111B, 00110110B, 10110101B, 11110101B, 00010111B, 11110111B, 10110111B A, (80H) A, TABLE-$-7 HL, 0F80H W, (PC + A) (HL), W
Note:DB is a byte data difinition instruction.
COM0 COM1 COM2 SEG0 SEG1 COM3
Figure 16-6 Example of COM, SEG Pin Connection (1/4 Duty)
Table 16-6 Example of Display Data (1/4 Duty)
No. display Display data No. display Display data
0
11011111
5
10110101
1
00000110
6
11110101
2
11100011
7
00000111
3
10100111
8
11110111
4
00110110
9
10110111
Page 194
TMP86FM26UG
Example 2: Table 16-6 shows an example of display data which are displayed using 1/2 duty LCD in the same way as Table 16-7. The connection between pins COM and SEG are the same as shown in Figure 16-7.
COM0 SEG3 SEG0 SEG2 SEG1 COM1
Figure 16-7 Example of COM, SEG Pin Connection
Table 16-7 Example of Display Data (1/2 Duty)
Display data Number High order address 0 1 2 3 4 **01**11 **00**10 **10**01 **10**10 **11**10 Low order address **01**11 **00**10 **01**11 **01**11 **00**10 5 6 7 8 9 Number High order address **11**10 **11**11 **01**10 **11**11 **11**10 Low order address **01**01 **01**01 **00**11 **01**11 **01**11 Display data
Note: *: Don't care
Page 195
16. LCD Driver
16.4 Control Method of LCD Driver TMP86FM26UG
16.4.3 Example of LCD drive output
COM0 COM1 COM2 SEG0 SEG1 COM3
EDSP SEG0 VLCD3 0 SEG1 VLCD3 0 Display data area Address
0F80H 1011 0101
VLCD3 COM0 0 VLCD3 COM1 0 VLCD3 COM2 0 VLCD3 COM3 0 VLCD3
COM0-SEG0 (Selected)
0 -VLCD3 VLCD3
COM2-SEG1 (Non selected)
0 -VLCD3
Figure 16-8 1/4 Duty (1/3 bias) Drive
Page 196
TMP86FM26UG
SEG1 SEG2 SEG0 COM0 COM1 COM2
EDSP SEG0 VLCD3 0 SEG1 VLCD3 0 SEG2 VLCD3 0 COM0 VLCD3 0 *: Don't care COM1 0 VLCD3 COM2 0 VLCD3 COM0-SEG1 (Selected) 0 -VLCD3 VLCD3 COM1-SEG2 (Non selected) 0 -VLCD3 VLCD3
Display data area Address
0F80H 0F81H
*111 *010 **** *001
Figure 16-9 1/3 Duty (1/3 bias) Drive
Page 197
16. LCD Driver
16.4 Control Method of LCD Driver TMP86FM26UG
COM0
SEG3 COM0 COM2 COM1
COM1
EDSP VLCD3 SEG0 0 Display data area Address
0F80H **01 **01 0F81H **11 **10
SEG1
VLCD3 0
SEG2
VLCD3 0 VLCD3
SEG3
0 VLCD3
*: Don't care
COM0 0 VLCD3 COM1 0 VLCD3 0 VLCD3 -VLCD3 COM1-SEG2 (Non selected) 0 -VLCD3
COM0-SEG1 (Selected)
Figure 16-10 1/2 Duty (1/2 bias) Drive
Page 198
TMP86FM26UG
SEG0 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG1 SEG6 SEG2 SEG7 COM0
Display data area Address
0F80H 0F81H 0F82H 0F83H
EDSP ***0 ***1 ***1 ***1 ***1 ***0 ***0 ***1 SEG7 SEG4 SEG0 VLCD3 0 VLCD3 0 VLCD3 0 COM0 VLCD3 0
*: Don't care
VLCD3 COM0-SEG0 (Selected) 0 -VLCD3 VLCD3 COM0-SEG4 (Non selected) 0 -VLCD3
Figure 16-11 Static Drive
Page 199
16. LCD Driver
16.4 Control Method of LCD Driver TMP86FM26UG
Page 200
TMP86FM26UG
17. FLASH Memory
17.1 Outline
The TMP86FM26UG incorporates 32768 bytes of FLASH memory (Address 8000H to FFFFH). Of these bytes, 512 bytes (Address 8000H to 81FFH) can be used as data memory. When these 512 bytes (Address 8000H to 81FFH) are used as data memory, the 32256 bytes (Address 8200H to FFFFH) can be used as program memory. The writing to FLASH memory is controlled by FLASH control register (EEPCR), FLASH status register (EEPSR) and FLASH write emulate time control register (EEPEVA). The FLASH memory of the TMP86FM26UG features: * The FLASH memory is constructed of 512 pages FLASH memory and one page size is 64 bytes (512 pages x 64 bytes = 32768 bytes). * The TMP86FM26UG incorporates a 64-byte temporary data buffer. The data written to FLASH memory is temporarily stored in this data buffer. After 64 bytes data have been written to the temporary data buffer, the writing to FLASH memory automatically starts by page writing (The 64 bytes data are written to specified page of FLASH simultaneously). At the same time, page-by-page erasing occurs automatically. So, it is unnecessary to erase individual pages in advance. * The FLASH control circuit incorporates an oscillator dedicated to the FLASH. So FLASH writing time is independent of the system clock frequency (fc). In addition, because an FLASH control circuit controls writing time for each FLASH memory cell, the writing time varies in each page (Typically 4 ms per page). * Controlling the power for the FLASH control circuit (regulator and voltage step-up circuit) achieves low power consumption if the FLASH is not in use (Example: When the program is executed in RAM area).
17.2 Conditions for Accessing the FLASH Areas
The conditions for accessing the FLASH areas vary depending on each operation mode. The following tables shows FLASH are access conditions. Table 17-1 FLASH Area Access Conditions
Operation Mode Area MCU mode (Note1) Data Memory Program Memory 8000H to 81FFH 8200H to FFFFH Write/read/fetch Read/fetch only
(Note 3)
Serial PROM mode (Note 2) supported Write/read/fetch supported
Note 1: "MCU mode" shows NORMAL1/2 and SLOW1/2 modes. Note 2: Serial PROM mode" shows the FLASH controlling mode. For details, refer to "2.19 Serial PROM mode" Note 3: "Fetch" means reading operation of FLASH data as an instruction by CPU.
Page 201
17. FLASH Memory
17.3 Differences among Product Series TMP86FM26UG
17.3 Differences among Product Series
The specifications of the FLASH product (TMP86FM26UG) are different from those of the emulation chip (TMP86FM26UG) as listed below. See " 17.5.2 Control " for explanations about the control registers.
FLASH Product (TMP86FM26UG) Rewriting the EEPCR register It is possible to rewrite the EEPCR register only when the program execution area in use is RAM/BOOT-ROM It is possible only to write- and read-access the EEPEVA register. The writing to this register does not affect the function. Typically 4 ms (Independent of the system clock) The time required to emulate FLASH writing is put under control. The FLASH write time is set up using the EEPEVA register (Dependent on the system clock). Emulation Chip (TMP86FM26UG)
Accessing the EEPEVA register
FLASH write time (The emulation chip is written to emulation memory instead of FLASH)
Executing a read instruction/fetch to the 8000H to FFFFH area when EEPSR = "1"
If EEPSR = "1", executing a read instruction/fetch to the FLASH area causes FFH to be read regardless of what the current ROM data is. Fetching FFH results in a software interrupt occurring. The debugger memory window always displays ROM data.
Executing a write instruction to the 8000H to 81FFH area when EEPCR = "0011", EEPSR = "1" and EEPSR = "0".
MCU mode SerialPROM mode The EEPSR is set to "1" (Write enabled).
The EEPSR stays at "0" (Write disabled). Executing a write instruction to the 8200H to FFFFH area when EEPCR = "0011", EEPSR = "1" and EEPSR = "0". In the debugger memory window, it is possible to rewrite the 8200H to FFFFH area (The EEPSR remains unchanged). The EEPSR is set to "1" (Write enabled). 512 bytes of emulation memory are included in the 8000H to 81FFH area. (Turning off the power for the emulation chip erases data in the emulation memory.)
MCU mode
SerialPROM mode
Data memory (8000H to 81FFH)
512 bytes of FLASH are included in the 8000H to 81FFH area.
BOOT-ROM Operating voltage
2 Kbytes are included in the 3800H to 3FFFH area. VDD = 1.8 to 3.6 V VDD = 1.8 to 3.3 V
17.4 FLASH Memory Configuration
64 consecutive bytes in the FLASH area are treated as one group, which is defined as a page. The TMP86FM26UG incorporates a one-page temporary data buffer. Writing data to FLASH is temporarily stored in this 64-byte data buffer. After 64 bytes data have been written to the temporary data buffer, these data are written to specified page of FLASH at a time. However, data can be read from any address byte by byte.
17.4.1 Page Configuration
The FLASH area has a page configuration of 64 bytes/page as shown below. The total number of bytes in it is 512 pages x 64 bytes (= 32768 bytes). The writeable area is 8000H to FFFFH in Serial PROM mode.
Note:The program memory (8200H to FFFFH) can be written only in the Serial PROM mode. For details of the Serial PROM mode, refer to "2.19 Serial PROM mode".
Page 202
TMP86FM26UG
Address 8000H 8010H 8020H 8030H 8040H 8050H 8060H 8070H 8080H 8090H 80A0H 80B0H 80C0H 80D0H 80E0H 80F0H
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Page0
Page1
Page2
Page3
FFE0H FFF0H
Page511
Figure 17-1 Page Configuration
Page 203
17. FLASH Memory
17.5 Data Memory of FLASH(address 8000H to 81FFH) TMP86FM26UG
17.5 Data Memory of FLASH(address 8000H to 81FFH)
The TMP86FM26UG incorporates 512 bytes (8000H to 81FFH) of data memory of FLASH, which features: * In the MCU mode, user-created programs can rewrite the data memory of FLASH in page (64 bytes) units. (It can be used to save application last keys and preset data.) * In the serial PROM mode, it is possible to perform serial writing to the data memory of FLASH in the same manner as for the program memory. So, initial values can be factory-set in the data memory of FLASH. * Using support programs incorporated in the BOOT-ROM makes it easy to write to the FLASH.
17.5.1 Configuration
Address input 16 Temporary data buffer (64 bytes) Count up with write data counter Clear
512 Overflow
8
Data input Write time counter Overflow EN Q Regulator
Flash Memory
End of write
D CP R
VIN
Address bus
Serial PROM mode Program area chip select signal Data area chip select signal RAM/BOOT-ROM fetch signal WR signal SYSCR1 SYSCR2 SYSCR2 Decoder D Request to generate an interrupt vector
Data bus
CPU WAIT signal D Q EN FLASH warm-up counter Overflow Q
CP R
CP R
MNPWDW
ATPWDW
4
EEPMD
EEPRS
BFBUSY EWUPEN
EEPSR RD signal
EEPCR
EEPSR
Figure 17-2 Data Memory
Page 204
WINT
TMP86FM26UG
17.5.2 Control
The FLASH is controlled by FLASH control register (EEPCR), FLASH status register (EEPSR) and FLASH write emulate time control register (EEPEVA). FLASH Control Register
EEPCR (0FE0H) 7 6 EEPMD 5 4 3 2 EEPRS 1 ATPWDW 0 MNPWDW (Initial value: 1100 *011)
EEPMD
FLASH write enable control (Write protect)
1100: 0011: Other:
FLASH write disable FLASH write enable values: Reserved
Program Execution Area RAM/ BOOT FLASH
EEPRS
FLASH write forcible stop
0: 1:
FLASH writing is forced to stop. (The write data counter is initialized.) * After writing "1" to EEPRS, it is automatically cleared to "0". Automatic power shut down is executed in IDLE0/1/2 and SLEEP0/1/2 modes. Automatic power shut down is not executed in IDLE0/1/2 and SLEEP0/1/2 modes. (The power is always supplied in these modes.
Read only
ATPWDW
Automatic power control for the FLASH control circuit in the IDLE0/1/2, SLEEP0/1/2 modes. (This bit is available only when MNPWDW is set to "1".) Software-based power control for the FLASH control circuit
0: 1:
R/W R/W
MNPWDW
0: 1:
The power for the FLASH control circuit is turned off. The power for the FLASH control circuit is turned on
Read only
Note 1: The EEPMD, EEPRS, and MNPWDW can be rewritten only when a program fetch is taking place in the RAM or BOOTROM area. If an attempt is made to rewrite the EEPCR register when a program is being executed in the FLASH area, the EEPMD, EEPRS, and MNPWDW keep holding the previous data; they are not rewritten. Note 2: To write to the FLASH, set the EEPMD with "0011B" in advance when a program fetch is taking place in the RAM area. However, this processing is not required if a support program in the BOOT-ROM is used. Note 3: To forcibly stop writing of FLASH, set the EEPRS to "1" when a program fetch is taking place in the RAM area. Note 4: The ATPWDW functions only if the MNPWDW is "1". If the MNPWDW is "0", the power for the FLASH control circuit is kept turned off regardless of the setting of the ATPWDW. Note 5: When a STOP mode is executed, the power for the FLASH control circuit is turned off regardless of the setting of the ATPWDW. If the MNPWDW is "0", entering/exiting the STOP mode allows the power for the FLASH control circuit to be kept turned off. Note 6: Executing a read instruction to the EEPCR register results in bit3 being read as undefined. Bit2 is always read as "0". Note 7: The following attention is necessary when the MNPWDW is set or cleared.
When the MNPWDW is changed from "1" to "0"
Clear the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) to "0" in advance to disable an interrupt. After that, do not set IMF to "1" during EEPSR = "0". If a watchdog timer is used as interrupt request, clear the binary counter for the watchdog timer just before MNPWDW is changed from "1" to "0". When write to or read from the Flash memory, make sure that the EEPSR is "1" by software. Once the MNPWDW is rewritten from "0" to "1" by software, keep performing software-based polling until the EEPSR becomes "1".
When the MNPWDW is changed from "0" to "1"
Page 205
17. FLASH Memory
17.5 Data Memory of FLASH(address 8000H to 81FFH) TMP86FM26UG
FLASH Status Register
EEPSR (0FE1H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 WINT 1 EWUPEN 0 BFBUSY (Initial value: **** *010)
WINT
Interrupt detection during a write to the FLASH
0: Not detected 1: Detected (Interrupt occurred) * WINT is automatically cleared to "0" when read instruction is executed to EEPSR. Operating (Power on) Temporary data buffer empty 1 Writing 1 1 Halt (power off) or warm-up Disable 0 1 Read only
Control circuit status EWUPEN FLASH control circuit status monitor FLASH status
BFBUSY
FLASH write busy flag
0
Note 1: If a nonmaskable interrupt occurs during a write to the FLASH, the WINT is set to "1" and the writing is discontinued, and then warm-up (CPU wait) for the control circuit of Flash memory is executed. (The write data counter is initialized.) If WINT = "1" is detected in the nonmaskable interrupt service routine, a write is not completed successfully. So, it is necessary to try a write again. The content of the page to which a write is taking place may be changed to an unexpected value depending on the timing when the WINT becomes "1". Note 2: Even if a nonmaskable interrupt occurs during an FLASH warm-up, the CPU stays at a halt until the warm-up is finished. Note 3: The WINT is automatically cleared to "0" when a read instruction is executed to the EEPSR register. Note 4: When MNPWDW is changed from "0" to "1", EWUPEN becomes "1" after taking 210/fc [s] (if SYSCK = "0") or 23/fs [s] (if SYSCK = "1"). Before accessing the FLASH, make sure that the EWUPEN is "1" in the RAM area. Note 5: If the BFBUSY is "1", executing a read instruction or fetch to the FLASH area causes FFH to be read. Fetching FFH results in a software interrupt occurring.
FLASH Write Emulation Time Control Register (Setting of this register functions only in emulation chip (TMP86FM26UG).)
EEPEVA (0FE2H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 EEPSUCR 0 (Initial value: **** *000)
Emulation Chip (TMP86FM26UG) NORMAL1/2 IDEL1/2 mode Controlling the FLASH write emulation time [s] for emulation chip 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 216/fc 215/fc 214/fc 213/fc 212/fc Reserved Reserved Reserved SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode 27/fc 26/fc 25/fc 24/fc 23/fc Reserved Reserved Reserved
FLASH Product (TMP86FM26UG) All operation modes
EEPSUCR
R/W Typ. 4 ms (regardless of register settings and the sysytem clock)
Note 1: Only in the emulation chip, the EEPSUCR functions. In the FLASH product, it is possible only to write- and read-access the register. It does not actually function. Because the FLASH product incorporates a dedicated oscillator, its write time is independent of the system clock. Note 2: Executing a read instruction to the EEPEVA register results in bit7 to 3 being read as undefined. Note 3: The following table lists the write emulation time specified by the setting of the EEPSUCR. Select an appropriate value according to the operating frequency used. The shading indicates recommended settings.
Page 206
TMP86FM26UG
EEPSUCR Setting 000 001 Write Time [ms] 010 011 100
NORMAL1/2 Mode fc=16 MHz 4.10 2.05 1.02 0.51 0.26 fc=8 MHz 8.19 4.10 2.05 1.02 0.51 fc=4 MHz 16.38 8.19 4.10 2.05 1.02 fc=2 MHz 32.77 16.38 8.19 4.10 2.05 fc=1 MHz 65.54 32.77 16.38 8.19 4.10
SLOW1/2 Mode fs=32.768kHz 3.91 1.95 0.98 0.49 0.24
17.5.3 FLASH Write Enable Control (EEPCR)
In the FLASH product, the control register can be used to disable a write to the FLASH (Write protect) in order to prevent a write to the FLASH from occurring by mistake because of a program error or microcontroller malfunction. To enable a write to the FLASH, set the EEPCR with 0011B. To disable a write to the FLASH, set the EEPCR with 1100B. A reset initializes the EEPCR to 1100B to disable a write to the FLASH. Usually, set the EEPCR with 1100B, except when it is necessary to write to the FLASH.
Note:The EEPCR can be rewritten only when a program is being executed in the RAM area. Executing a write instruction to the EEPCR in the FLASH area does not change its setting.
17.5.4 FLASH Write Forcible Stop (EEPCR)
To forcibly stop a write to the FLASH, set the EEPCR to "1". Setting the EEPCR to "1" initializes the write data counter of data buffer and forcibly stops a write, and then a warm-up (CPU wait) for the control circuit of Flash memory is executed. After warm-up period, the EEPSR is cleared to "0". The warm-up period is 210/fc (SYSCK = "0") or 23/fs (SYSCK = "1"). After this, if writing to FLASH starts again, data is stored as the first byte of the temporary data buffer and sets the EEPSR to "1". Therefore, it is necessary to write 64 bytes data to the temporary data buffer. After 1 to 63 bytes are saved to the temporary data buffer, if the EEPCR is set to "1" the specified page of FLASH is not written. (It keeps previous data.)
Note 1: After 64 bytes are written to the temporary data buffer, the setting the EEPCR to "1" may cause the writing the page of FLASH to an unexpected value. Note 2: The EEPCR can be rewritten only when a program is being executed in the RAM area. In the FLASH area, executing a write instruction to the EEPCR does not affect its setting. Note 3: During the warm-up period for Flash memory (CPU wait), the peripheral circuits continue operating, but the CPU stays at a halt until the warm-up is finished. Even if an interrupt latch is set to "1" by generating of interrupt request, an interrupt sequence doesn't start till the end of warm-up. If interrupts occur during a warm-up period with IMF = "1", the interrupt sequence which depends on interrupt priority will start after warm-up period. Note 4: When the EEPCR is set to "1" with EEPSR = "0", a warm-up is not executed. Note 5: If executed a write or read instruction to the Flash area immediately after setting EEPCR, insert one or more machine cycle instructions after setting EEPCR.
Example :Reads the Flash memory data immediately after setting EEPCR to "1"
LD LD NOP LD A,(HL) HL,8000H (EEPCR), 3FH ; Sets EEPCRto"1" ; NOP(Do not execute write or read instruction immediately after setting EEPCR,) ; Reads the data of address 8000H (Write or read instruction to the Flash memory)
Page 207
17. FLASH Memory
17.5 Data Memory of FLASH(address 8000H to 81FFH) TMP86FM26UG
Buffer 0
?
Data 0
Data 0'
Buffer 1
? ?
Data 1
Data 1'
Buffer 2
Data 2'
Buffer 63
?
Write to the EPCR = "1"
EEPCR Write instruction to the FLASH area Write data counter EEPSR 0 1 2 0 0 1 2 3 4 5
210/fc or 23/fs [s]
EEPSR Overflow FLASH warm-up counter 0 0
FLASH control circuit status
Normal operation
Warm-up in progress (CPU WAIT)
Normal operation
Figure 17-3 Write Data Counter Initialization and Write Forcible Stop 17.5.5 Power Control for the FLASH Control Circuit
For the FLASH product, it is possible to turn off the power for FLASH control circuit (such as a regulator) to suppress power consumption if the FLASH area is not accessed. For the emulation chip (TMP86FM26UG), the register setting and the CPU wait functions behave in the same manner as for the FLASH product to maintain compatibility; however, power consumption is not suppressed. The EEPCR and EEPCR are used to control the power for the FLASH control circuit. If the power for the FLASH control circuit is turned off according to the setting of these registers, starting to use the circuits again needs to allow warm-up time for the power supply. Table 17-2 Power Supply Warm-up Time (CPU wait) for the FLASH Control Circuit
NORMAL1/2 IDLE0/1/2 Mode 2 /fc [s] (64 ms @16 MHz)
10
SLOW1/2 SLEEP0/1/2 Mode 2 /fs [s] (244 ms @32.768 kHz)
3
STOP Mode (when EEPCR = "1") To Return to a NORMAL Mode STOP warm-up time + 210/fc [s] To Return to a SLOW Mode STOP warm-up time + 23/fs [s]
17.5.5.1 Software-based Power Control for the FLASH Control Circuit (EEPCR)
The EEPCR is a software-based power control bit for the FLASH control circuit. When a program is being executed in the RAM area, setting this bit enables software-based power control. Clearing the EEPCR to "0" immediately turns off the power for the FLASH control circuit. Once the EEPCR is switched from "0" to "1", before attempting a read or fetch from the FLASH Page 208
TMP86FM26UG
area, it is necessary to insert a warm up period by software until the power supply is stabilized. In this case, because the CPU wait is not executed, any other instructions except accessing to Flash (write or read) are available. When MNPWDW is changed from "0" to "1", EWUPEN becomes "1" after taking 210/fc [s] (SYSCK = "0") or 23/fs [s] (SYSCK = "1"). Usually software-based polling should be performed until the EEPSR becomes "1". An example of setting is given below. Example of controlling the EEPCR 1. Transfer a program for controlling the EEPCR to the RAM area. 2. Release an address trap in the RAM area (Setup the WDTCR1 and WDTCR2 registers). 3. Jump to the control program transferred to the RAM area. 4. Clear the interrupt master enable flag (IMF = "0"). 5. Clear the binary counter if the watchdog timer is in use. 6. To turn off the power for the FLASH control circuit, clear the EEPCR to "0". 7. Perform CPU processing as required. 8. To access the FLASH area again, set the EEPCR to "1". 9. Keep program polling until the EEPSR becomes "1". (Upon completion of an FLASH warming-up, the EEPSR is set to "1". It takes 210/ fc (SYSCK = "0") or 23/fs (SYSCK = "1") until EWUPEN becomes "1".) This procedure enables the FLASH area to be accessed. If the EEPCR is "1", entering a STOP mode forcibley turns off the power for the FLASH control circuit. When the STOP mode is released, a STOP mode oscillation warm-up is carried out, and then the CPU wait period (Warm-up for stabilizing of FLSH power supply circuit) is automatically performed. If the EEPCR is "0", entering / exiting the STOP mode keeps the power for the FLASH control circuit turned off.
Note 1: If the EEPSR is "0", do not access (Fetch, read, or write) the FLASH area. Executing a read instruction or fetch to the FLASH area causes FFH to be read. Fetching FFH results in a software interrupt occurring. Note 2: To clear the EEPCR to "0", clear the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) to "0" in advance to disable an interrupt. After that, do not set IMF to "1" during EEPSR = "0". Note 3: If the EEPCR is "0", generating a nonmaskable interrupt automatically rewrites the MNPWDW to "1" to warm up the FLASH control circuit (CPU wait). That time, the peripheral circuits continue operating, but the CPU stays at a halt until the warm-up is finished. Note 4: The EEPCR can be rewritten only when a program is being executed in the RAM area. In the FLASH area, executing a write instruction to the EEPCR does not affect its setting. Note 5: If a watchdog timer is used as interrupt request, clear the binary counter for the watchdog timer just before MNPWDW is changed from "1" to "0". Note 6: During the warm-up period with a software polling of EEPSR, if a nonmaskable interrupt occurs, the CPU stays at a halt until the warm-up is finished.
Page 209
17. FLASH Memory
17.5 Data Memory of FLASH(address 8000H to 81FFH) TMP86FM26UG
Specify MNPWDW = 0 EEPCR
Specify MNPWDW = 1
210/fc or 23/fs [s] EEPSR Software polling
EEPSR
Program execution area
FLASH area
a+2
RAM area a+2 Overflow
FLASH area
FLASH warm-up counter FLASH control circuit status
0
0
Normal operation
a+2 Power-off state
Warm-up in progress (CPU is operating)
Normal operation
Figure 17-4 Software-base Power Control for the FLASH Control Circuit (EEPCR)
Example :Performing software-based power control for the FLASH control circuit
sRAMAREA: DI LD CLR : : SET sLOOP1: TEST JRS JP (WDTCR2),4EH (EEPCR).0 : : (EEPCR).0 (EEPSR).1 T,sLOOP1 MAIN ; Set the EEPCR to "1" ; Monitor the EEPSR register. ; Jump to sLOOP1 if EEPSR = "0". ; Jump to the FLASH area. ; Disable an interrupt (IMF = "0") ; Clear the binary counter if the watchdog timer is in use ; Clear the EEPCR to "0".
17.5.5.2 Automatic Power Control for the FLASH Control Circuit (EEPCR)
The EEPCR is an automatic power control bit for the FLASH control circuit. It is possible to suppress power consumption by automatically shutting down the power for the FLASH control circuit when an operation mode is changed to IDLE0/1/2 and SLEEP0/1/2 modes. This bit can be specified regardless of the area in which a program is being executed. After the EEPCR is cleared to "0", entering an operation mode (IDLE0/1/2 or SLEEP0/1/ 2) where the CPU is at a halt automatically turns off the power for the FLASH control circuit. Once the operation mode is released, the warm-up time (CPU wait) is automatically counted to resume normal processing. The CPU wait period is either 210/fc (SYSCK = "0") or 23/fs (SYSCK = "1"). If the EEPCR is "1", releasing the operation mode does not cause the CPU wait. If EEPCR = "1", executing a STOP mode forcibly turns off the power for the FLASH control circuit regardless of the setting of the EEPCR. When the STOP mode is released, a STOP mode oscillation warm-up is carried out, and then an FLASH control circuit warm-up (CPU wait) is automatically performed. If the EEPCR is "0", entering/exiting a STOP mode allows the power for the FLASH control circuit to be kept turned off.
Page 210
TMP86FM26UG
Note 1: The EEPCR functions only if the EEPCR is "1". If the EEPCR is "0", the power for the FLASH control circuit is kept turned off when an operation mode is executed or released. Note 2: During an FLASH warm-up (CPU wait), the peripheral circuits continue operating, but the CPU stays at a halt. Even if an interrupt latch is set under this condition, no interrupt process occurs until the CPU wait is completed. If the IMF is "1" when the interrupt latch is set, interrupt process takes place according to the interrupt priority after the CPU has started operating.
EEPCR Specify ATPWDW = 0 EEPCR 210/fc or 23/fs [s] EEPSR
EEPSR Overflow FLASH warm-up counter FLASH control circuit status Operation mode 0 0
Normal operation
a+2 Power-off state a+2
a+2 Warm-up in progress C a+2 PU WAIT
Normal operation NORMAL or SLOW mode
IDEL or SLEEP mode NORMAL or SLOW mode a+2 a+2
Program execution area
FLASH area or RAM area
Figure 17-5 Automatic Power Control for the FLASH Control Circuit (EEPCR) 17.5.6 Accessing the FLASH Data Memory Area
During the writing to the data memory of FLASH area, neither a read nor fetch can be performed for the 8000H to FFFFH area. Therefore, to write the data memory of FLASH, the program being executed should be jumped to RAM area or should be jumped to the support program in BOOT-ROM. For details about the support program in BOOT-ROM, refer to "" 17.5.6.2 Method of Using Support Programs in the BOOT-ROM "". An LD instruction can be used to read data from the data memory of FLASH area byte by byte. The support program incorporated in the BOOT-ROM can also be used to read data from the data memory of FLASH area. If a nonmaskable interrupt occurs during a write to the FLASH (EEPSR = "1"), the WINT is set to "1" and the writing is discontinued, and then the warm-up (CPU wait) for control circuit of Flash memory is executed (The write data counter is also initialized). If WINT = "1" is detected in the nonmaskable interrupt service routine, a write is not completed successfully. So, it is necessary to try a write again. The warm-up period is 210/fc (SYSCK = "0") or 23/fs (SYSCK = "1"). After 1 to 63 bytes are saved to the temporary data buffer, if an interrupt generates, the specified page of FLASH is not written. (It keeps previous data.)
Note 1: After 64 bytes are written to the temporary data buffer, the generating of an interrupt may cause the writing the page of FLASH to an unexpected value. Note 2: During the warm-up period for Flash memory (CPU wait), the peripheral circuits continue operating, but the CPU stays at a halt until the warm-up is finished. Even if an interrupt latch is set to "1" by generating of interrupt request, an interrupt sequence doesn't start till the end of warm-up. If interrupts occur during a warm-up period with IMF = "1", the interrupt sequence which depends on interrupt priority will start after warm-up period. Note 3: When write the data to Flash memory from RAM area, disable all the nonmaskable interrupt by clearing interrupt master enable flag (IMF) to "0" beforehand. However, in support program of BOOT-ROM, there is no need to clear the IMF because BOOT-ROM already has a DI (Disable Interrupt) instruction.
Page 211
17. FLASH Memory
17.5 Data Memory of FLASH(address 8000H to 81FFH) TMP86FM26UG
17.5.6.1 Method of Developing the Control Program in the RAM Area
To develop the program in RAM, the write control program should be stored in FLASH beforehand or should load from external device by using peripheral function (Example: UART, SIO etc). Given below is an example of developing the control program in the RAM area. (1) Example of developing and writing the control program to the RAM area 1. For the emulation chip, set the EEPEVA register with an optimum time value according to the operating frequency. 2. Transfer the write control program to the RAM area. 3. Release an address trap in the RAM area (Set up the WDTCR1 and WDTCR2 registers). 4. Jump to the RAM area. 5. Monitor the EEPSR. If it is "0", set the EEPCR to "1", and then start and keep polling until the EEPSR becomes "1". 6. Clear the interrupt master enable flag (IMF = "0"). 7. Set the EEPCR with "3BH" (to enable a write to the FLASH). 8. Execute a write instruction for 64 bytes to the FLASH area. 9. Start and keep polling by software until the EEPSR becomes "0". (Upon completion of an erase and write to the FLASH cells, the EEPSR is set to "1". For the FLASH product, the required write time is typically 4 ms. For the emulation chip, it is the value specified in the EEPEVA register.) 10. Set the EEPCR with "CBH" (to disable a write to the FLASH). 11. Jump to the FLASH area (Main program).
Note: See " (2) Method of specifying an address for a write to the FLASH " for a description about the FLASH address to be specified at step 8 above.
(2)
Method of specifying an address for a write to the FLASH The FLASH page to be written is specified by the 10 high-order bits of the address of the first-byte data. The first-byte data is stored at the first address of the temporary data buffer. If the data to be written is, for example, 8040H, page 1 is selected, and the data is stored at the first address of the temporary data buffer. Even if the 6 low-order bits of the specified address is not 000000B, the firstbyte data is always stored at the first address of the data buffer. Any address can be specified as the second and subsequent address within FLASH area (for the MCU mode, 8000 to 81FFH and, for the serial PROM mode, 8000H to FFFFH). The write data bytes are stored in the temporary data buffer in the sequence they are written, regardless of what address is specified. Usually, the address that is the same as the first-byte is specified for the second and subsequent address. A 16-bit transfer instruction (LDW) can also be used for writing to the temporary data buffer.
Page 212
TMP86FM26UG
Example :Data bytes 00H to 3FH are written to page 1
DI LD LD LD LD sLOOP1: LD INC CMP JR sLOOP2: TEST JRS LD (EEPSR).0 F,sLOOP2 (HL),0CBH ; Jump to sLOOP2 if EEPSR = "1". ; Specify the EEPCR (IX),C C C,40H NZ,sLOOP1 ; Store data to the temporary data buffer. (A write page is selected when the first byte is written.) ;C=C+1 ; Jump to sLOOP1 if C is not 40H C,00H HL,EEPCR IX,8040H (HL),3BH ; Specify the EEPCR register address. ; Specify a write address. ; Specify the EEPCR ; Disable an interrupt (IMF = "0")
Note: If the BFBUSY is "1", executing a read instruction or fetch to the FLASH area causes "FFH" to be read. Fetching "FFH" results in a software interrupt occurring.
0 00H 10H 20H
30H
1 01H 11H 21H
31H
2 02H 12H 22H
32H
3 03H 13H 23H
33H
4
5
6
7 07H
8
9
A 0AH 1AH 2AH
3AH
B
C
D
E
F
04H 05H 06H
08H 09H
0BH 0CH 0DH E0H 0FH 1BH 1CH 1DH 1EH 1FH 2BH 2CH 2DH 2EH 2FH
3BH 3CH 3DH 3EH 3FH
14H 15H 16H Temporary 19H 24H 25H 26H data buffer 29H
34H 35H 36H 37H 38H 39H
Address 8030H 8040H 8050H 8060H 8070H
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
00H 10H 20H
30H
01H 11H 21H
31H
02H 12H 22H
32H
03H 13H 23H
33H
04H 05H 06H 14H 15H 16H 24H 25H 26H
34H 35H 36H
07H
08H 09H 19H 29H
39H
0AH 1AH 2AH
3AH
0BH 0CH 0DH E0H 0FH 1BH 1CH 1DH 1EH 1FH 2BH 2CH 2DH 2EH 2FH
3BH 3CH 3DH 3EH 3FH
Page1
37H 38H
Figure 17-6 Data Buffer and Write Page (Example)
Page 213
17. FLASH Memory
17.5 Data Memory of FLASH(address 8000H to 81FFH) TMP86FM26UG
Buffer 0
?
Data 0
Buffer 1
? ?
Data 1 64 bytes are written at a time.
Buffer 2
Data 2
Buffer 63
?
Data before writeing
Data 63
FLASH cell Write instruction to the FLASH area
Erasing a+2
a+2 Writing Data after writing
Overflow Write data counter EEPSR 0 1 2 3 0 Write completed Write time (typically 4 ms)
EEPSR
Figure 17-7 Write to the FLASH Data Memory Area (In case of FLASH product)
Buffer 0
?
Data 0
Buffer 1
? ?
Data 1 64 bytes are written at a time.
Buffer 2
Data 2
Buffer 63
?
Data 63
Emulation memory Write instruction to the FLASH area
Data before writeing Data after writing Overflow
Write data counter EEPSR
0
1
2
3
63
0 Write completed Write time (Set by EEPEVA register)
EEPSR
Figure 17-8 Write to the FLASH Data Memory Area (In case of emulation chip)
Note 1: The emulation chip is written to emulation memory instead of FLASH cell. Note 2: In case of emulation chip,the data stacked to data buffer is written to emulation memory just before EEPSRis changed from "1" to "0". therefore, if the writing of FLASH is stopped forcibly after the write data counter becomes overflow, the memory value on the page subjected to a write may be different from FLASH product.
Page 214
TMP86FM26UG
17.5.6.2 Method of Using Support Programs in the BOOT-ROM
The BOOT-ROM of TMP86FM26UG has Support Program to simplify writing/reading of FLASH. This program supports three subroutines. 1. Writing to data FLASH from RAM 2. Reading from data FLASH to RAM 3. Reading from program FLASH to RAM In addition to a program for controlling a write in the serial PROM mode, the BOOT-ROM incorporates support programs for simplifying a write to the data memory of FLASH in the MCU mode. The support programs take the form of a subroutine. After setting general-purpose registers with the necessary data, just execute a CALL instruction for a support program. It enables a write to and a read from the FLASH. There are two subroutines in BOOT-ROM. The Table 17-3 shows the function of these subroutines. Table 17-3 Support Program (Subroutines) in BOOT-ROM
Program CALL address Function Writing to data memory of FLASH (8000H to 81FFH) from RAM area is available. 64byte data can be written at a time. Reading from FLASH memory (8000H to FFFFH) into RAM area is available. 64-byte data can be read at a time.
Support program 1
3E00H
Support program 2
3E2CH
When using the support program, it is unnecessary to prepare an FLASH write program in advance or develop it in the RAM area. Support program 1 enables 64 consecutive data bytes to be transferred from the RAM area to any data memory of FLASH page in block. (Only data memory of FLASH is available.) Support program 2 enables data to be transferred from any FLASH memory page (Both data memory of FLASH and program memory are available.) to a specified 64-byte consecutive RAM area in block. How to use the support programs in the BOOT-ROM is explained below. See " (3) Support program 1 (Block transfer from the RAM area to the FLASH data area) " and " (4) Support program 2 (Block transfer from the FLASH area to the RAM area) " for the source code of the support programs. (1) Example of using support program 1 to write data to the FLASH data area (Block transfer from the RAM area to the FLASH data area to the RAM area) 1. For the emulation chip, set the EEPEVA register with the optimum time according to the operating frequency. 2. Set data in the transfer-source RAM area. 3. Set the RAM area start address (Transfer source) in the HL register. 4. Set the FLASH data area start address (Transfer destination) in the DE register. 5. Set "1FH" in the B register. (Be sure to set 1FH (Half of the number of bytes to be written.)) 6. Clear the binary counter if the watchdog timer is in use. 7. Execute a CALL instruction to "3E00H". 8. Data is transferred from the RAM area to the FLASH data area in block. After several milliseconds, program control is returned to the main routine.
Note 1: Steps 1 to 6 above are executed in the FLASH area. Note 2: Support program 1 rewrites the HL, DE, B, and WA registers. If the existing data in them are necessary, save it in advance. Note 3: If the EEPCR is "0", executing support program 1 rewrites it to "1" before performing a block transfer. Note 4: Executing a CALL instruction for support program 1 consumes two bytes of stack.
Page 215
17. FLASH Memory
17.5 Data Memory of FLASH(address 8000H to 81FFH) TMP86FM26UG
Note 5: If the watchdog timer is in use, be sure to clear the binary counter for it before executing a CALL instruction to 3E00H. Note 6: Do not specify the address from 8200H to FFFFH as a transfer destination address in MCU mode.
Example : Setting up HL = 0050H, DE = 8100H, and B = 1FH, and executing a CALL instruction for support program 1 (3E00H)
RAM area FLASH data area
0050H 0051H Block transfer 0052H 0053H
50H 0AH 12H 55H
Write
8100H 8101H 8102H 8103H
50H 0AH 12H 55H
008FH
40H
813FH
40H
Figure 17-9 Example of Using Support Program 1 to Write Data to the FLASH Data Area
(2) Using support program 2 to read data from the FLASH area (Block transfer from the FLASH area to the RAM area) 1. Set the RAM area start address (Transfer destination) in the HL register. 2. Set the FLASH area start address (Transfer source) in the DE register. 3. Set "1FH" in the B register. (Be sure to set 1FH (Half of the number of bytes to be read.)) 4. Execute a CALL instruction to "3E2CH". 5. Data is transferred from the FLASH area to the RAM area in block. Upon completion of processing, program control is returned to the main routine.
Note 1: A LD instruction can be used to read data from the FLASH area in byte units without using support program 2. Note 2: Steps 1 to 4 above are executed in the FLASH area. Note 3: Support program 2 rewrites the HL, DE, B, and WA registers. If the existing data in them are necessary, save it in advance. Note 4: Executing a CALL instruction for support program 2 consumes two bytes of stack.
Example : Setting up HL = 0050H, DE = 8100H, and B = 1FH, and executing a CALL instruction for support program 2 (3E2CH)
RAM area FLASH data area
0050H 0051H Block transfer 0052H 0053H
50H 0AH 12H 55H
Read
8100H 8101H 8102H 8103H
50H 0AH 12H 55H
008FH
40H
813FH
40H
Figure 17-10 Example of Using Support Program 2 to Read Data from the FLASH area
Page 216
TMP86FM26UG
(3)
Support program 1 (Block transfer from the RAM area to the FLASH data area) Shown below is the support program source code for writing data to the FLASH.
Example :
USER_SUB_WRITE section code abs = 3E00H sUSER_main1: TEST JRS sEEP_warmingup: SET TEST JRS sRAM_to_EEP: DI AND LD sBFBUSY_loop: LD LD INC INC DEC JRS sEEP_write_end: TEST JRS LD RET (EEPSR).0 F,sEEP_write_end (EEPCR),0CBH ; Disable a write to hte FLASH ; Perform polling on the BFBUSY flag. WA,(HL) (DE),WA HL HL B F,sBFBUSY_loop ; Read data from the RAM. ; Writeh data to the FLASH. DE,0FFC0H (EEPCR),3BH ; Disable an interrupt. ; Mask the 6 low-order bits. ; Enable a write to the FLASH. (EEPCR).0 (EEPSR).1 t,sEEP_warmingup ; Set the EEPCR to "1". ; Wait until a warm-up is completed. (EEPSR).1 f,sRAM_to_EEP ; Jump sRAM_to_EEP if the EEPSR is "1".
(4)
Support program 2 (Block transfer from the FLASH area to the RAM area) Shown below is the support program source code for reading data from the FLASH.
Page 217
17. FLASH Memory
17.5 Data Memory of FLASH(address 8000H to 81FFH) TMP86FM26UG
Example :
USER_SUB_READ section code abs = 3E2CH sUSER_main2: AND LD sEEP_read_loop: LD LD INC INC INC INC DEC JRS RET WA,(DE) (DE),WA HL HL DE DE B F,sEEP_read_loop DE,0FFC0 (EEPCR),0CBH ; Mask the 6 low-order bits. ; Disable a write to the FLASH.
Page 218
TMP86FM26UG
17.6 FLASH Program Memory
The TMP86FM26UG incorporates 32256 bytes (8200H to FFFFH) of program memory. If the data memory of FLASH is not in use, the TMP86FM26UG can be used as an FLASH product with 32768 full bytes. To write data to the program memory (Data memory of FLASH), execute the serial PROM mode.
17.6.1 Configuration
The program memory has the same configuration as for the data memory of FLASH. See Section " 17.5.1 Configuration ".
17.6.2 Control
The program memory is controlled in the same manner as for the data memory of FLASH. See Section " 17.5.2 Control ".
17.6.3 FLASH Write Enable Control (EEPCR)
The FLASH write enable control register for the program memory behaves in the same manner as for the data memory of FLASH. See Section " 17.5.3 FLASH Write Enable Control (EEPCR) ".
17.6.4 FLASH Write Forcible Stop (EEPCR)
The FLASH write forcible stop register for the program memory behaves in the same manner as for the data memory of FLASH. See Section " 17.5.4 FLASH Write Forcible Stop (EEPCR) ".
17.6.5 Power Control for the FLASH Control Circuit
The power for the program memory control circuit is controlled in the same manner as for the data memory of FLASH. See Section " 17.5.5 Power Control for the FLASH Control Circuit ".
17.6.6 Accessing the FLASH Program Memory Area
Basically, a write to the program memory area is carried out using UART communication after the serial PROM mode is entered. For explanations about what control is performed in the serial PROM mode, see the following descriptions.
Page 219
17. FLASH Memory
17.6 FLASH Program Memory TMP86FM26UG
Page 220
TMP86FM26UG
18. Input/Output Circuit
18.1 Control pins
The input/output circuitries of the TMP86FM26UG control pins are shown below.
Control Pin I/O Input/Output Circuitry Remarks
Osc.enable
fc VDD RO
Resonator connecting pins (High frequency) Rf = 3 M (typ.) RO = 1 k (typ.)
VDD
XIN XOUT Input Output
Rf
XIN
XOUT
Osc.enable
XTEN fs VDD RO
Resonator connecting pins (Low frequency) Rf = 20 M (typ.) RO = 220 k (typ.)
XTIN XTOUT
Input Output
VDD
Rf
XTIN
XTOUT
VDD RIN
Hysteresis input Pull-up resistor RIN = 220 k (typ.) R = 100 k (typ.)
RESET
Input
Reset input
Address-trap-reset Watchdog-timer-reset System-clock-reset Clock stop detection reset
R
VDD R RIN
Pull-down resistor RIN = 70 k (typ.) R = 100 k (typ.)
TEST
Input
Page 221
18. Input/Output Circuit
18.2 Input/Output Ports TMP86FM26UG
18.2 Input/Output Ports
Port I/O Input/Output Circuitry Remarks
Initial "High-Z" Segment output VDD Data output
P1 I/O Tri-state I/O Hysteresis input High current outout (N-ch) LCD segment output
Output latch input I/O control Pin input Disable R
R = 100 (typ.)
Initial "High-Z" Segment output VDD Data output
P5 P7 I/O Tri-state I/O LCD segment output
Output latch input I/O control Pin input Disable R
R = 100 (typ.)
Initial "High-Z" P-ch control Data output
P20 I/O
VDD
Output latch input Disable Pin input (Control input) R
Sink open drain output or C-MOS output Hysteresis input High current output (N-ch) R = 100 (typ.)
Initial "High-Z" VDD Output latch input
P21 P22 I/O Sink open drain output Hysteresis input
Data output Disable Pin input
R
R = 100 (typ.)
Initial "High-Z" P-ch control
P23 P24 P3 P6 I/O
VDD
Sink open drain output or C-MOS output Hysteresis input High current output (N-ch)
(Control output) Data output Output latch input Disable Pin input (Control inut) R
R = 100 (typ.)
Note: Although a voltage exceeding VDD can be output from pins P1, P5 and P7 when used as LCD segment output, the absolute maximum rating for input voltage on these pins is "-0.3 to VDD + 0.3 "[V].
Page 222
TMP86FM26UG
19. Electrical Characteristics
19.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
The absolute maximum ratings are rated values which must not be exceeded during operation, even for an instant. Any one of the ratings must not be exceeded. If any absolute maximum rating is exceeded, a device may break down or its performance may be degraded, causing it to catch fire or explode resulting in injury to the user. Thus, when designing products which include this device, ensure that no absolute maximum rating value will ever be exceeded.
(Vss = 0 V) Parameter Symbol VDD VLCD VIN VOUT IOUT1 Output current(Per 1 pin) IOUT2 IOUT3 IOUT1 Output current(Total) IOUT2 IOUT3 Power dissipation[Topr = 85 C] Soldering temperature(time) Storage temperature Operating temperature PD Tsld Tstg Topr P1, P20, P23, P24, P3, P5, P6, P7 ports P21, P22, P5, P7 ports P1, P20, P23, P24, P3, P6 ports P1, P20, P23, P24, P3, P5, P6, P7 ports P21, P22, P5, P7 ports P1, P20, P23, P24, P3, P6 ports VDD V3 pin Pins Ratings -0.3 to 4.0 -0.3 to 4.0 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -1.8 3.2 30 -30 60 120 350 260 (10s) -55 to 125 -40 to 85 mW C C C mA mA Unit V V V V
Supply voltage Input voltage Output voltage
Page 223
19. Electrical Characteristics
19.2 Operating Conditions TMP86FM26UG
19.2 Operating Conditions
The Operating Conditions show the conditions under which the device be used in order for it to operate normally while maintaining its quality. If the device is used outside the range of Operating Conditions (power supply voltage, operating temperature range, or AC/DC rated values), it may operate erratically. Therefore, when designing your application equipment, always make sure its intended working conditions will not exceed the range of Operating Conditions.
19.2.1 MCU mode
(Vss = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85 C) Parameter Symbol Pins fc = 16 MHz fc = 8 MHz (In case of connecting the resonator) Supply voltage VDD fc = 4.2 MHz (In case of external clock input) fs = 32.768 kHz Condition NORMAL1,2 modes IDLE0,1,2 modes NORMAL1,2 modes IDLE0,1,2 modes NORMAL1,2 modes IDLE0,1,2 modes 1.8 SLOW1,2 modes SLEEP0,1,2 modes STOP mode VIH1 Input high voltage VIH2 VIH3 VIL1 Input low voltage VIL2 VIL3 Clock frequency (In case of connecting the resonator) Clock frequency (In case of external clock input) fc fs fc fs XIN,XOUT XTIN,XTOUT XIN,XOUT XTIN,XTOUT VDD = 1.8 to 3.6 V VDD = 2.7 to 3.6 V Except hysteresis input Hysteresis input Except hysteresis input Hysteresis input VDD 2.7 V VDD < 2.7 V VDD 2.7 V VDD < 2.7 V VDD = 1.8 to 3.6 V VDD = 2.7 to 3.6 V 1.0 30.0 1.0 30.0 VDD x 0.70 VDD x 0.75 VDD x 0.90 VDD x 0.30 0 VDD x 0.25 VDD x 0.10 8.0 16.0 34.0 4.2 16.0 34.0 MHz kHz MHz kHz V VDD V 1.8 Min 2.7 Max Unit
3.6
V
19.2.2 Serial PROM mode
(Vss = 0 V, Topr = 25C 5 C) Parameter Supply voltage Clock frequency Symbol VDD fc XIN, XOUT Pins Condition 2 MHz fc 16MHz VDD = 2.7 to 3.6 V Min 2.7 2.0 Max 3.6 16.0 Unit V MHz
Note: The operating temperature area of serial PROM mode is 25C 5 C and the operating area of high frequency of seria PROM mode is different from MCU mode.
Page 224
TMP86FM26UG
19.3 DC Characteristics
(Vss = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85 C) Parameter Hysteresis voltage Symbol VHS IIN1 Input current IIN2 IIN3 Input resistance High frequency feedback resistor Low frequency feedback resistor Output leakage current Output high voltage Output low voltage Output low current Supply current in NORMAL1, 2 modes Supply current in IDLE0, 1, 2 modes Supply current in SLOW1 mode Supply current in SLEEP1 mode Supply current in SLEEP0 mode Supply current in STOP mode VDD = 3.6 V VIN =3.4 V/0.2 Fetch area Flash area RAM area VDD = 3.0 V VIN = 2.8 V/0.2V fs = 32.768 kHz RIN1 RIN2 Rfx Rfxt ILO1 ILO2 VOH VOL IOL Hysteresis input TEST Sink Open Drain, Tri-state Port
RESET
Pins VDD = 3.3 V
Condition
Min 100 3.2 -
Typ. 0.4 70 220 3 20 20 5.3 3.4 3.1 2.2 850 7.0 850 5.5 850 4.5 0.5
Max -5 5 +5 450 -
Unit V
VDD = 3.6 V, VIN = 0 V VDD = 3.6 V, VIN = 3.6/0 V VDD = 3.6 V, VIN = 3.6 V VDD = 3.6 V, VIN = 3.6 V VDD = 3.6 V, VIN = 0 V VDD = 3.6 V VDD = 3.6 V VDD = 3.6 V, VOUT = 3.6 V VDD = 3.6 V, VOUT = 3.6 V / 0 V VDD = 3.6 V, IOH = -0.6 mA VDD = 3.6 V, IOL = 0.9 mA VDD = 3.6 V, VOL = 1.0 V VDD = 3.6 V VIN =3.4 V/0.2 V fc = 16 MHz fs = 32.768 kHz MNP = "1" MNP = "0" MNP&ATP = "1" MNP&ATP = "0" MNP = "1" MNP = "0" MNP&ATP = "1" MNP&ATP = "0" MNP&ATP = "1" MNP&ATP = "0"
A
TEST Pull-Down
RESET Pull-Up
k
XIN-XOUT XTIN-XTOUT Sink Open Drain Port Tri-state Port Tri-state Port,CMOS Port Except XOUT, Nch high current port Nch High current port Fetch area Flash area RAM area
M +10 10 0.4 7.3 5.0 5.0 4.0 1200 18 1200 16 1200 14 10 A mA
A V V mA
Note 1: Typical values show those at Topr = 25C, VDD = 5 V Note 2: Input current (IIN1, IIN3): The current through pull-up or pull-down resistor is not included. Note 3: The supply currents of SLOW2 and SLEEP2 modes are equivalent to IDLE0, 1, 2 Note 4: MNP (MNPWDW) shows bit0 in EEPCR register and ATP (ATPWDW) shows bit1 in EEPCR register. Note 5: "Fetch" means reading operation of FLASH data as an instruction by CPU.
Page 225
19. Electrical Characteristics
19.4 Timer Counter 1 input (ECIN) Characteristics TMP86FM26UG
19.4 Timer Counter 1 input (ECIN) Characteristics
(Vss = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85 C) Parameter Symbol Condition Frequency measurement mode VDD = 2.7 to 3.6 V Frequency measurement mode VDD = 1.8 to 2.7 V Single edge count Both edge count Single edge count Both edge count Min - Typ. - Max 16 MHz - - 8 Unit
TC1 input (ECIN input)
tTC1
19.5 LCD Characteristics
(Vss = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85 C) Parameter Symbol V2 pin V2-3OUT LCD output voltage (Lcd booster is enable) V3 pin V1 pin V1-3OUT V3 pin V1 pin V1-2OUT V1IN LCD reference voltage Capacity for LCD booster circuit V2IN V3IN CLCD V2 pin V1 pin V2 pin V3 pin LCD booster circuit is enable (V3 VDD) Pins Condition V3 VDD Reference supply pin: V1 SEG/COM pin: No load V3 VDD Reference supply pin: V2 SEG/COM pin: No load V3 VDD Reference supply pin: V3 SEG/COM pin: No load Min - - - - - - 0.8 1.6 2.4 0.1 Typ. V1x2 V1x3 V2x1/2 V2x3/2 V2x1/3 V2x2/3 - - - - Max - - - - - - 1.2 2.4 3.6 0.47 F V V Unit
Page 226
TMP86FM26UG
19.6 AC Characteristics
(Vss = 0.0 V, 2.7 V VDD < 3.6 V, Topr = -40 to 85 C) Parameter Symbol Condition NORMAL1, 2 modes Machine cycle time tcyc IDLE1, 2 modes SLOW1, 2 modes SLEEP1, 2 modes High-level clock pulse width Low-level clock pulse width High-level clock pulse width Low-level clock pulse width tWCH tWCL tWSH tWSL For external clock operation(XIN input) fc = 16 MHz For external clock operation(XTIN input) fs = 32.768 kHz Min 0.25 Typ. - Max 4 s 117.6 - 133.3 Unit
-
31.25
-
ns
-
15.26
-
s
(Vss = 0.0 V, 1.8 V VDD < 3.6 V, Topr = -40 to 85 C) Parameter Symbol Condition NORMAL1, 2 modes Machine cycle time tcyc IDLE1, 2 modes SLOW1, 2 modes SLEEP1, 2 modes High-level clock pulse width Low-level clock pulse width High-level clock pulse width Low-level clock pulse width tWCH tWCL tWSH tWSL For external clock operation(XIN input) fc = 4.2 MHz For external clock operation(XTIN input) fs = 32.768 kHz Min 0.5 Typ. - Max 4 s 117.6 - 133.3 Unit
-
119.04
-
ns
-
15.26
-
s
19.7 Flash Characteristics
(Vss = 0 V) Parameter Number of guaranteed writes (page writing) to Flash memory in serial PROM mode Number of guaranteed writes (page writing) to Flash memory in MCU mode Writing time to Flash data memory for one page (64 bytes) in MCU mode Condition VDD = 2.7 to 3.6 V, 2 MHz fc 16 MHz (Topr = 25 C 5 C) Min - Typ. - Max 105 Times VDD = 1.8 to 3.6 V at fc = 8 MHz VDD = 2.7 to 3.6 V at fc = 16MHz (Topr = -40 to 85 C) - 4 6 ms - - 105 Unit
Page 227
19. Electrical Characteristics
19.8 Oscillating Conditions TMP86FM26UG
19.8 Oscillating Conditions
XIN XOUT XTIN XTOUT
C1
C2
C1
C2
(1)High-frequency Oscillation
(2)Low-frequency Oscillation
Note 1: A quartz resonator can be used for high-frequency oscillation only when VDD is 2.7 V or above. If VDD is below 2.7V, use a ceramic resonator. Note 2: To ensure stable oscillation, the resonator position, load capacitance, etc. must be appropriate. Because these factors are greatly affected by board patterns, please be sure to evaluate operation on the board on which the device will actually be mounted. Note 3: The product numbers and specifications of the resonators by Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd. are subject to change. For up-to-date information, please refer to the following URL: http://www.murata.com
19.9 Handling Precaution
- The solderability test conditions for lead-free products (indicated by the suffix G in product name) are shownbelow. 1. When using the Sn-37Pb solder bath Solder bath temperature = 230 C Dipping time = 5 seconds Number of times = once R-type flux used 2. When using the Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu solder bath Solder bath temperature = 245 C Dipping time = 5 seconds Number of times = once R-type flux used Note: The pass criteron of the above test is as follows: Solderability rate until forming 95 % - When using the device (oscillator) in places exposed to high electric fields such as cathode-ray tubes, we recommend electrically shielding the package in order to maintain normal operating condition.
Page 228
TMP86FM26UG
20. Package Dimensions
LQFP64-P-1010-0.50E Rev 02
Unit: mm
12.0 0.2 1.25 TYP 10.0 0.1
48 33
49
32
10.0 0.1
64 17 1 16
1.25TYP
0.5
0.2
+0.07 -0.03
0.08
M
0.1 0.05
1.4 0.05
12.0 0.2 1.6MAX
0.08
0.125 +0.075 -0.035
0~10
(0.5) 0.45~0.75
Page 229
0.25
20. Package Dimensions
TMP86FM26UG
Page 230
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit microcontroller series TLCS-870/C (LSI). Toshiba provides a variety of development tools and basic software to enable efficient software development. These development tools have specifications that support advances in microcomputer hardware (LSI) and can be used extensively. Both the hardware and software are supported continuously with version updates. The recent advances in CMOS LSI production technology have been phenomenal and microcomputer systems for LSI design are constantly being improved. The products described in this document may also be revised in the future. Be sure to check the latest specifications before using. Toshiba is developing highly integrated, high-performance microcomputers using advanced MOS production technology and especially well proven CMOS technology. We are prepared to meet the requests for custom packaging for a variety of application areas. We are confident that our products can satisfy your application needs now and in the future.


▲Up To Search▲   

 
Price & Availability of TMP86FM26UG

All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022  

[Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy]
Mirror Sites :  [www.datasheet.hk]   [www.maxim4u.com]  [www.ic-on-line.cn] [www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net] [www.alldatasheet.com.cn] [www.gdcy.com]  [www.gdcy.net]


 . . . . .
  We use cookies to deliver the best possible web experience and assist with our advertising efforts. By continuing to use this site, you consent to the use of cookies. For more information on cookies, please take a look at our Privacy Policy. X